WO2023058120A1 - Radio communication device and communication method - Google Patents

Radio communication device and communication method Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2023058120A1
WO2023058120A1 PCT/JP2021/036849 JP2021036849W WO2023058120A1 WO 2023058120 A1 WO2023058120 A1 WO 2023058120A1 JP 2021036849 W JP2021036849 W JP 2021036849W WO 2023058120 A1 WO2023058120 A1 WO 2023058120A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
communication
slot
transmission data
wireless communication
unit
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2021/036849
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
良太 森若
賀須男 藤野
和敏 小林
忠輔 弓場
裕喜 南田
諒 下留
次郎 村岡
Original Assignee
株式会社安川電機
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 株式会社安川電機 filed Critical 株式会社安川電機
Priority to PCT/JP2021/036849 priority Critical patent/WO2023058120A1/en
Priority to JP2023552444A priority patent/JPWO2023058120A1/ja
Publication of WO2023058120A1 publication Critical patent/WO2023058120A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W28/00Network traffic management; Network resource management
    • H04W28/02Traffic management, e.g. flow control or congestion control
    • H04W28/06Optimizing the usage of the radio link, e.g. header compression, information sizing, discarding information
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation

Definitions

  • the present disclosure relates to wireless communication devices and communication methods.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a system including a robot, a processing device, a robot controller that controls the robot, a processing device controller that controls the processing device, and a programmable logic controller that generates commands for the robot controller and the processing device controller. disclosed.
  • the present disclosure provides a wireless communication device that is effective in achieving both communication reliability and communication speed.
  • a wireless communication device repeats a time division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots including a first type communication slot and a second type communication slot are arranged in a time division manner to
  • the transmission data generated by the wireless communication unit that performs wireless communication with the communication unit and the application has the first attribute
  • the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit to the remote wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot.
  • a communication control unit for transmitting the transmission data from the wireless communication unit to the other wireless communication unit using the second type communication slot when the transmission data has the second attribute.
  • a communication method repeats a time-division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots including a first-type communication slot and a second-type communication slot are arranged in a time-division manner to perform wireless communication.
  • the transmission data generated by the application has the first attribute while wireless communication is being performed between the unit and the other wireless communication unit, the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot. and causing the wireless communication unit to transmit the transmission data to the wireless communication unit using the second type communication slot when the transmission data has the second attribute.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a device system
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a robot
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating configurations of a control server and a base station
  • FIG. 4 is a table illustrating storage contents of a pattern storage unit
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a time division duplex pattern
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between time division duplex patterns and communication cycles
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between time division duplex patterns and communication cycles
  • FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the target arrangement and the arrangement of communication slots in each communication cycle
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a local controller and mobile station; 3 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware configuration of a control server and base stations; FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware configuration of a local controller and mobile stations; FIG. 4 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure for setting a time division duplex pattern and a cycle start slot; 4 is a flow chart illustrating a wireless communication procedure; 4 is a flow chart illustrating a wireless communication procedure; 4 is a flowchart illustrating a communication control procedure; 7 is a flowchart illustrating a communication mode switching procedure; 4 is a flow chart illustrating a wireless communication procedure; 4 is a flow chart illustrating a wireless communication procedure; 4 is a flowchart illustrating a communication control procedure; 7 is a flowchart illustrating a communication mode switching procedure;
  • a communication system 1 shown in FIG. 1 is a system that performs wireless communication using time division duplexing.
  • a communication system 1 includes a wireless communication system 2 and an application 3 .
  • the radio communication system 2 performs radio communication by repeating a time division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots are arranged in a time division manner.
  • Arranging by time division means arranging so as to line up along a time axis representing the passage of time.
  • Time division duplexing is a wireless communication method that enables transmission and reception in the same frequency band by switching transmission and reception for each time.
  • the wireless communication system 2 performs wireless communication using a 5G network as an example of wireless communication using time division duplexing.
  • the radio communication system 2 performs radio communication by local 5G.
  • Local 5G is a 5G network that is built for a limited area compared to public 5G, in which carriers provide communication services over a wide area.
  • the wireless communication system 2 has a base station 200 and one or more mobile stations 400.
  • the radio communication system 2 has multiple mobile stations 400 .
  • the base station 200 is installed in a local 5G target area and performs wireless communication with a plurality of mobile stations 400 .
  • Each of the plurality of mobile stations 400 can move within the target area and wirelessly communicate with the base station 200 .
  • a plurality of communication slots in wireless communication includes time division duplex uplink slots.
  • the plurality of communication slots may further include time division duplexed downlink slots.
  • An uplink slot is a slot in which mobile station 400 transmits data to base station 200 (base station 200 receives data from mobile station 400).
  • a downlink slot is a slot in which base station 200 transmits data to mobile station 400 (mobile station 400 receives data from base station 200).
  • the application 3 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication. Cyclic communication is communication in which data transmission and reception of the same content are repeated.
  • the application 3 may use the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication with a constant communication cycle (communication period).
  • Application 3 may repeat a communication cycle including generation of transmission data based on reception data received by base station 200 from mobile station 400 and transmission of transmission data from base station 200 to mobile station 400 .
  • Application 3 may repeat a communication cycle including generation of transmission data based on reception data received by mobile station 400 from base station 200 and transmission of transmission data from mobile station 400 to base station 200 .
  • Application represents an application target of wireless communication by the wireless communication system 2.
  • a specific example of the application 3 is a device system 10 including multiple devices.
  • the communication system 1 performs wireless communication in the device system 10 .
  • Each of the plurality of devices may be a hardware device configured by a set of hardware, or may be a software device implemented in a computer by software.
  • the device system 10 includes multiple machines 20, a control server 100, and a time server 101.
  • Machine 20 is an example of a hardware device.
  • machine 20 is an industrial machine.
  • Specific examples of industrial machines include machine tools, carrier devices, robots, and the like.
  • a servo system including a servo motor and a servo drive circuit is also an example of an industrial machine.
  • the machine 20 has a machine body 30 and a local controller 300.
  • the machine main body 30 is a machine that realizes operations.
  • the local controller 300 controls the machine body 30 so as to implement the operations.
  • the machine body 30A is a mobile robot that works on a work while moving.
  • the machine main body 30A has an automatic guided vehicle 31 and a robot 40 .
  • the automatic guided vehicle 31 is driven by the local controller 300 to move.
  • the robot 40 is installed on the unmanned guided vehicle 31.
  • the robot 40 is driven by the local controller 300 to carry out work such as transportation, processing, and assembly of the work.
  • the robot 40 is, for example, a vertically articulated industrial robot. As shown in FIG. 2 , the robot 40 has a base portion 41 , a turning portion 42 , a first arm 43 , a second arm 44 , a wrist portion 45 and a tip portion 46 .
  • the base 41 is installed on the automatic guided vehicle 31 .
  • the swivel part 42 is mounted on the base part 41 so as to be rotatable around the vertical axis 51 .
  • the robot 40 has a joint 61 that attaches the pivot 42 to the base 41 so as to be rotatable about the axis 51 .
  • the first arm 43 is connected to the swivel portion 42 so as to be rotatable about an axis 52 that intersects (for example, is perpendicular to) the axis 51 .
  • the robot 40 has a joint 62 that connects the first arm 43 to the pivot 42 so as to be rotatable about the axis 52 .
  • An intersection includes being in a twisted relationship, such as a so-called overpass. The same applies to the following.
  • the first arm 43 extends from the turning portion 42 along one direction that intersects (for example, orthogonally) the axis 52 .
  • the second arm 44 is connected to the end of the first arm 43 so as to be rotatable around an axis 53 parallel to the axis 52 .
  • the robot 40 has a joint 63 connecting the second arm 44 to the first arm 43 so as to be rotatable about the axis 53 .
  • the second arm 44 includes an arm base 47 extending from the end of the first arm 43 along one direction intersecting (for example, perpendicular to) the axis 53 and an arm further extending from the end of the arm base 47 along the same one direction. and end 48 .
  • Arm end 48 is rotatable about axis 54 with respect to arm base 47 .
  • Axis 54 intersects (eg, is orthogonal to) axis 53 .
  • robot 40 has a joint 64 that connects arm end 48 to arm base 47 such that arm end 48 is rotatable about axis 54 .
  • the wrist 45 is connected to the end of the arm end 48 so as to be rotatable about an axis 55 that intersects (for example, is perpendicular to) the axis 54 .
  • the robot 40 has a joint 65 that connects the arm end 48 such that the wrist 45 is rotatable about the axis 55 .
  • Wrist 45 extends from the end of arm end 48 along a direction that intersects (eg, is perpendicular to) axis 55 .
  • the tip 46 is connected to the end of the wrist 45 so as to be rotatable about an axis 56 that intersects (eg, is perpendicular to) the axis 55 .
  • robot 40 has a joint 66 that connects tip 46 to wrist 45 such that tip 46 is rotatable about axis 56 .
  • An end effector is provided at the distal end portion 46 .
  • Specific examples of the end effector include a hand for gripping a work, a work tool for processing and assembling a work, and the like.
  • Actuators 71 , 72 , 73 , 74 , 75 , 76 drive joints 61 , 62 , 63 , 64 , 65 , 66 .
  • Each of the actuators 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76 has, for example, an electric motor and a transmission section (for example, reduction gear) that transmits the power of the electric motor to the joints 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66. .
  • actuator 71 drives joint 61 to rotate pivot 42 about axis 51 .
  • Actuator 72 drives joint 62 to rotate first arm 43 about axis 52 .
  • Actuator 73 drives joint 63 to rotate second arm 44 about axis 53 .
  • Actuator 74 drives joint 64 to rotate arm end 48 about axis 54 .
  • Actuator 75 drives joint 65 to rotate wrist 45 about axis 55 .
  • Actuator 76 drives joint 66 to rotate tip 46 about axis 56 .
  • the machine main body 30B is an unmanned guided vehicle that transports objects such as workpieces.
  • the machine main body 30B has an unmanned guided vehicle 33 and a loading platform 34.
  • the automatic guided vehicle 33 is driven by the local controller 300 to move.
  • the loading platform 34 is provided on the automatic guided vehicle 33 and supports the object to be transported.
  • the control server 100 includes multiple controllers 111 that respectively control multiple machines 20 .
  • Each of the multiple controllers 111 is an example of a software device, and is implemented in the control server 100 by software.
  • the plurality of controllers 111 may be hardware devices independent of each other on hardware.
  • Communication system 1 communicates from controller 111 to machine 20 via downlink slots and from machine 20 to controller 111 via uplink slots. is connected to the control server 100 via the .
  • a plurality of mobile stations 400 of the radio communication system 2 are provided in a plurality of machines 20 respectively, and are connected to a plurality of local controllers 300 respectively.
  • the control server 100 transmits data to each of the multiple machines 20 via the base station 200 and the mobile station 400 and receives data from each of the multiple machines 20 via the mobile station 400 and the base station 200 .
  • Each of the plurality of local controllers 300 transmits data to the control server 100 via the mobile station 400 and base station 200 and receives data from the control server 100 via the base station 200 and mobile station 400 .
  • the application 3 uses the wireless communication system 2 to transmit and receive control data for controlling the machine 20 .
  • control data include command data for controlling the machine 20 and response data of the industrial machine according to the command data.
  • the command data is data representing an operation command for the machine 20, for example.
  • a specific example of the data representing the motion command is target motion data representing the target motion of the machine 20 .
  • the target data includes target positions, target velocities, etc. for the machine 20 .
  • the data representing the operation command may be target output data representing a target output (for example, target torque or target current) for causing the operation of the machine 20 to follow the target operation.
  • the response data is, for example, data representing an action performed by the machine 20 in response to command data.
  • Specific examples of the data representing the motion include the motion speed of the machine 20, the position of the machine 20, and the like.
  • the application 3 repeatedly executes a communication cycle including transmission of command data from the controller 111 to the machine 20 and transmission of response data from the machine 20 to the controller 111 by cyclic communication.
  • the controller 111 repeatedly executes a communication cycle including transmission of command data and reception of response data by cyclic communication.
  • the machine 20 repeatedly executes a communication cycle including reception of command data and transmission of response data by cyclic communication.
  • the time server 101 is a computer connected to the control server 100 via a wired communication network and generates global time.
  • the time server 101 may be incorporated in the control server 100 or may be incorporated in the base station 200 .
  • the global time is used to align at least the time inside the control server 100 and the time inside the base station 200 with the global time.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 control cyclic communication.
  • the communication control unit 112 controls communication using a downlink slot among cyclic communications.
  • the communication control unit 112 and the base station 200 constitute a wireless communication device 5 that performs communication from the controller 111 to the machine 20 using downlink slots.
  • the communication control unit 312 controls communication using a downlink slot among cyclic communications.
  • the communication control unit 312 and the mobile station 400 constitute a wireless communication device 6 that performs communication from the machine 20 to the controller 111 using uplink slots.
  • the communication control unit 112 is incorporated in the control server 100 and the communication control unit 312 is incorporated in the local controller 300. As described above, when the plurality of controllers 111 are hardware devices independent of each other, the communication control unit 112 may be incorporated in each of the plurality of controllers 111 . Communication control unit 112 may be incorporated in base station 200 and communication control unit 312 may be incorporated in mobile station 400 .
  • the communication system 1 acquires configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, and according to the configuration of the device system 10, the downlink slots for time division duplex and the time division duplex It may be configured to set a time division duplex pattern that defines an arrangement with uplink slots, and to perform wireless communication by repeating the set time division duplex pattern. According to this configuration, the time division duplex pattern is set according to the configuration of the device system, and wireless communication is performed by repeating the set time division duplex pattern. Therefore, it is effective for more timely wireless communication.
  • the communication reliability of a plurality of communication slots may differ depending on the position in the time division duplex pattern.
  • other wireless communication systems 900 may perform other wireless communications via a space that at least partially overlaps the space in which the wireless communication system 2 wirelessly communicates.
  • Another radio communication system 900 repeats another time division duplex pattern in which a plurality of other communication slots are arranged in a time division manner to perform the other radio communication.
  • a specific example of such another wireless communication system 900 is a system that performs wireless communication by public 5G as described above.
  • another wireless communication system 900 has a base station 910 and a terminal 920 .
  • Terminal 920 is, for example, a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, tablet computer, or laptop computer.
  • the base station 910 is installed at the end of the communication network of the carrier, performs wireless communication with the terminal 920 , and relays communication between the communication network and the terminal 920 .
  • the plurality of communication slots of the time division duplex pattern repeated by the radio communication system 2 include a synchronous slot and an asynchronous slot. slots.
  • a synchronous slot is a communication slot whose status as a downlink slot or an uplink slot matches the communication slot of another wireless communication performed at the same timing.
  • An asynchronous slot is a communication slot that does not match the communication slot of another wireless communication performed at the same timing in terms of whether it is a downlink slot or an uplink slot.
  • communication using asynchronous slots is more susceptible to deterioration in communication quality due to interference with communication using communication slots of other wireless communications.
  • the plurality of communication slots can include first-type communication slots (for example, synchronous slots) and second-type communication slots (for example, asynchronous slots) with mutually different communication reliability. Therefore, when the transmission data generated by the controller 111 has the first attribute, the wireless communication device 5 transmits the transmission data from the base station 200 (wireless communication unit) to the mobile station 400 (counterpart wireless communication) using the first type communication slot. and if the transmission data has the second attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the base station 200 (wireless communication unit) to the mobile station 400 (counterpart wireless communication unit) using the second type communication slot. and may be configured to perform
  • the wireless communication device 6 transmits the transmission data from the mobile station 400 (wireless communication section) to the base station 200 (counterpart wireless) using the first type communication slot. communication unit), and when the transmission data has the second attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the mobile station 400 (wireless communication unit) to the base station 200 (counterpart wireless communication unit) using the second type communication slot. and may be configured to perform.
  • the time division duplex pattern is not necessarily suitable for cyclic communication of applications. Therefore, the communication system 1 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is one time division of wireless communication. and controlling cyclic communication to occur within a duplex pattern.
  • the arrangement of communication slots in each communication cycle of cyclic communication (hereinafter referred to as "slot arrangement") can be adjusted without changing the time division duplex pattern. Therefore, it is effective in applying wireless communication to various applications.
  • control server 100 The configurations of the control server 100, the base station 200, the local controller 300, and the mobile station 400 will be illustrated in more detail below.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating configurations of the control server 100 and the base station 200.
  • the control server 100 has a plurality of controllers 111 and a communication control unit 112 as functional components (hereinafter referred to as “functional blocks").
  • Each of the plurality of controllers 111 (hereinafter simply referred to as “controller 111 ”) controls the corresponding machine 20 .
  • the controller 111 controls the machine 20 by repeating a control cycle including one or more communications from the controller 111 to the machine 20 and one or more communications from the machine 20 to the controller 111 .
  • the controller 111 repeats a control cycle including receiving the response data from the machine 20 , generating the command data based on the response data, and transmitting the command data to the machine 20 .
  • the controller 111 calculates, as command data, the target output data for causing the operation of the machine 20 represented by the response data to follow the target operation.
  • the controller 111 calculates target output data by performing a proportional operation, a proportional/integral operation, or a proportional/integral/differential operation on the deviation between the target operation and the operation of the machine 20 .
  • the controller 111 repeats a constant control cycle (control period). For example, controller 111 executes a control cycle each time a control clock signal is generated that signals the passage of a certain control cycle. In this case, the processing executed by the controller 111 between the generation of the control clock signal and the generation of the next control clock signal is one control cycle.
  • the controller 111 may receive response data after generating command data and transmitting command data. In this case, the controller 111 generates command data based on the response data received in the previous control cycle.
  • the controller 111 may receive the response data and generate the command data after sending the command data. In this case, the controller 111 transmits command data generated in the previous control cycle.
  • a control cycle includes a communication cycle.
  • a communication cycle includes sending command data and receiving response data.
  • the controller 111 causes the communication control unit 112 to receive reception data such as response data and transmit transmission data such as command data. For example, the controller 111 causes the communication control unit 112 to receive the received data, and acquires the received data received by the communication control unit 112 . Further, the controller 111 outputs transmission data to the communication control section 112 and causes the communication control section 112 to transmit the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 112 receives received data and transmits transmitted data via the base station 200 .
  • Base station 200 has transmission buffer 211 , reception buffer 212 , radio communication section 213 , and clock 214 .
  • the radio communication unit 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern to perform radio communication with the mobile station 400 (counterpart radio communication unit). For example, the radio communication unit 213 reads transmission data from the transmission buffer 211 and transmits the transmission data to the mobile station 400 by downlink slots of the time division duplex pattern. Also, the wireless communication unit 213 receives reception data from the mobile station 400 in the uplink slot of the time division duplex pattern, and stores the reception data in the reception buffer 212 .
  • the communication control unit 112 stores the transmission data acquired from the controller 111 in the transmission buffer 211. As described above, the transmission data stored in transmission buffer 211 is read by wireless communication section 213 . Therefore, storing the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 is an example of handing over the transmission data to the wireless communication unit 213 . Data stored in the transmission buffer 211 is transmitted to the machine 20 via the base station 200 and mobile station 400 .
  • the communication control unit 112 reads the reception data received by the wireless communication unit 213 from the mobile station 400 from the reception buffer 212 .
  • Reading received data from the reception buffer 212 is an example of obtaining received data from the wireless communication unit 213 .
  • Receive data is received from machine 20 via mobile station 400 and base station 200 by reading the receive data from receive buffer 212 .
  • the clock 214 repeatedly generates the time necessary for repeating the time division duplex pattern.
  • the time generated by the clock 214 will be referred to as "base station time”.
  • Radio communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern based on the base station time.
  • the wireless communication unit 213 executes a time division duplex pattern each time a communication clock signal that notifies the passage of a certain repetition cycle is generated.
  • the communication performed between the generation of the communication clock signal and the generation of the next communication clock signal is one time division duplex pattern.
  • Radio communication section 213 may execute the time division duplex pattern each time a repetition cycle elapses from a predetermined start time at the base station time.
  • one time-division duplex pattern is communication performed from the time obtained by adding an integral multiple of the repetition cycle to the start time until one repetition cycle elapses.
  • the radio communication unit 213 may repeat the time division duplex pattern in synchronization with another time division duplex pattern repeated by the other radio communication system 900 .
  • clock 214 may be configured to generate base station time synchronized to the global time.
  • the clock 214 receives the global time from the time server 101 through communication that guarantees time synchronization, such as TSN (Time Sensitive Networking) communication via a wired communication network, and sets the base station time in synchronization with the received global time. Generate.
  • the clock 214 synchronizes the base station time to the global time, and then repeatedly updates the base station time by counting clock pulses at regular cycles.
  • the clock 214 may repeatedly synchronize the base station time to the global time at predetermined time intervals.
  • Radio communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern in synchronization with other time division duplex patterns based on the base station time synchronized with the global time.
  • the wireless communication system 900 executes another time division duplex pattern each time a repetition cycle elapses from a predetermined start time at a time synchronized to global time.
  • the wireless communication unit 213 also repeats the time division duplex pattern every time the repetition cycle elapses from the start time at the base station time synchronized with the global time.
  • the radio communication unit 213 starts the time division duplex pattern at the same time as the other radio communication system 900 starts another time division duplex pattern.
  • the communication system 1 acquires the configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, and according to the configuration of the device system 10, the time division duplex downlink slot and the time division duplex slot. setting a time division duplex pattern that defines the alignment with the uplink slots of the communication; and repeating the set time division duplex pattern to perform wireless communication.
  • the control server 100 further comprises a configuration information acquisition section 113 and a communication pattern setting section 114. FIG.
  • the configuration information acquisition unit 113 acquires configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10. For example, the configuration information acquisition unit 113 acquires configuration information from multiple controllers 111 .
  • the communication pattern setting unit 114 sets a time division duplex pattern that defines the arrangement of time division duplex downlink slots and time division duplex uplink slots according to the configuration of the device system 10 .
  • Communication pattern setting section 114 notifies wireless communication section 213 of the set time division duplex pattern.
  • Radio communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern notified from communication pattern setting section 114 to perform the above-described radio communication.
  • the communication pattern setting unit 114 sets the time division duplex pattern to the first pattern when the device system 10 is in the first configuration, and the device system 10 is in the second configuration different from the first configuration.
  • the time division duplex pattern is set to a second pattern in which the arrangement of downlink slots and uplink slots is different from the first pattern.
  • the second configuration may be a configuration with a larger amount of communication information from the multiple machines 20 to the multiple controllers 111 than the first configuration.
  • the communication pattern setting unit 114 sets the time division duplex pattern to the second pattern having a larger number of uplink slots than the first pattern.
  • the communication pattern setting unit 114 may set the time division duplex pattern to a second pattern in which the number of uplink slots is greater than the number of downlink slots. .
  • the configuration information may include communication configuration information indicating the relationship between the communication traffic from the controllers 111 to the machines 20 and the communication traffic from the machines 20 to the controllers 111 .
  • the communication pattern setting section 114 may set the time division duplex pattern based on the communication configuration information.
  • the configuration may include the hardware configuration of the device system 10.
  • the first configuration may include a first hardware configuration and the second configuration may include a second hardware configuration different from the first hardware configuration.
  • Specific examples of differences in hardware configuration include differences in the types and numbers of machines 20 included in the device system 10 .
  • the configuration may include work content to be executed by the device system 10.
  • a first configuration may involve having machine 20 perform a first task
  • a second configuration may involve having machine 20 perform a second task that is different from the first task.
  • differences in tasks include differences in the types and number of times of work realized by the operation of the machine 20 .
  • a configuration information acquisition unit 113 acquires configuration information when a plurality of machines 20 are controlled by a plurality of controllers 111, and a communication pattern setting unit 114 acquires configuration information when the configuration information changes. You may change your communication pattern.
  • the configuration information changes due to changes in the tasks that the plurality of controllers 111 cause the plurality of machines 20 to execute, the amount of communication per unit time from the plurality of controllers 111 to the plurality of machines 20 and the number of The relationship between the amount of communication per unit time from the machine 20 to the plurality of controllers 111 changes.
  • the communication pattern setting unit 114 may select a time division duplex pattern corresponding to the configuration of the device system 10 based on a reference table that defines time division duplex patterns for each of a plurality of configurations. In this case, the selected time division duplex pattern becomes the setting result of the time division duplex pattern by the communication pattern setting unit 114 .
  • the control server 100 may further have a pattern storage unit 115 that stores reference tables.
  • the communication pattern setting section 114 selects a time division duplex pattern corresponding to the configuration of the device system 10 in the reference table stored in the pattern storage section 115 .
  • FIG. 4 illustrates a reference table stored by the pattern storage unit 115.
  • FIG. The reference table illustrated in FIG. 4 associates identification information of a plurality of configurations with identification information of a plurality of time division duplex patterns, respectively.
  • the communication pattern setting unit 114 selects "pattern 2" associated with "configuration E”.
  • the first pattern may match other time division duplex patterns repeated in other wireless communications performed by other wireless communication systems 900 .
  • the second pattern consists of synchronization slots that match communication slots of other time division duplex patterns in terms of whether they are downlink slots or uplink slots, and synchronization slots that are different in terms of whether they are downlink slots or uplink slots. It may include synchronous slots and asynchronous slots that do not match the communication slots of the time division duplex pattern.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating a time division duplex pattern.
  • a time division duplex pattern 500R represents the time division duplex pattern in public 5G described above.
  • first three downlink slots 511 are arranged along the time axis, followed by two uplink slots 512 along the time axis, followed by four downlink slots 511. are arranged along the time axis.
  • a special slot 513 is arranged between the 3 downlink slots 511 and the 2 uplink slots 512 .
  • Special slot 513 is a slot that includes, in order, a transmission period from base station 200 to mobile station 400 , a non-transmission period, and a transmission period from mobile station 400 to base station 200 .
  • Special slot 513 is available as downlink slot 511 and is also available as uplink slot 512 .
  • a time division duplex pattern 500A illustrates a first pattern that matches the time division duplex pattern 500R.
  • Time division duplex pattern 500B illustrates the second pattern.
  • first three downlink slots 511 are arranged along the time axis, then two uplink slots 512 are arranged along the time axis, and then one uplink slot 512 is arranged along the time axis. are arranged, followed by two uplink slots 512 arranged along the time axis.
  • a special slot 513 is arranged between the 3 downlink slots 511 and the following 2 uplink slots 512 .
  • a special slot 513 is also arranged between the 1 downlink slot 511 and the following 2 uplink slot 512 .
  • the first communication slot 510 which is the downlink slot 511
  • the seventh communication slot 510 which is the downlink slot 511
  • the eighth communication slot 510 which is a special slot 513
  • the ninth and tenth communication slots 510 which are uplink slots 512 , correspond to asynchronous slots 522 .
  • the period T11 in which the first to eighth communication slots 510 are arranged is the synchronous period
  • the period T12 in which the ninth and tenth communication slots 510 are arranged is the asynchronous period. becomes.
  • a time division duplex pattern 500C shows another example of the second pattern.
  • first two downlink slots 511 are arranged along the time axis, followed by seven uplink slots 512 arranged along the time axis.
  • a special slot 513 is arranged between the second downlink slot 511 and the following seven uplink slot 512 .
  • the first and second communication slots 510 which are the downlink slots 511
  • the fourth and fifth communication slots 510 which are the uplink slots 512
  • a third special slot 513 which is a special slot 513 , is also available as a synchronization slot 521 .
  • the third communication slot 510 which is the uplink slot 512 can also be used as a synchronization slot 521 because the communication slot 510 performed by another wireless communication system 900 at the same timing is a special slot 513 .
  • the 7th to 10th communication slots 510 that are uplink slots 512 correspond to asynchronous slots 522 .
  • the period T21 in which the first to sixth communication slots 510 are arranged is the synchronous period
  • the period T22 in which the seventh to tenth communication slots 510 are arranged is the asynchronous period. becomes.
  • the synchronous slot 521 is an example of the first type communication slot 510 described above
  • the asynchronous slot 522 is an example of the second type communication slot 510 described above.
  • first type and “second type” are terms given for convenience to distinguish the communication slots 510, so the synchronous slot 521 is not necessarily the first type communication slot 510, and the asynchronous slot 522 is not necessarily the first type communication slot 510. may not be the second type communication slot 510 , the synchronous slot 521 may be the second type communication slot 510 and the asynchronous slot 522 may be the first type communication slot 510 .
  • the communication control unit 112 when the transmission data generated by the controller 111 has the first attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 213 to the mobile station 400 using the first type communication slot 510, and the transmission data generated by the controller 111 has the second attribute. , the transmission data may be transmitted from the wireless communication unit 213 to the mobile station 400 using the second type communication slot 510 .
  • attribute represents the property of data that does not change regardless of the value of the data.
  • a specific example of the attribute is the type of data.
  • the data type is the type of event represented by the data value. Data representing the "current position” as an example of an event remains data representing the "current position” even if the value representing the "current position” changes.
  • the priority of data is determined according to the type of data, the priority is also an example of an attribute.
  • the first attribute may be the first priority
  • the second attribute may be the second priority lower than the first priority.
  • the communication control unit 112 performs radio communication so that transmission data having the first priority is transmitted to the mobile station 400 through the synchronous slot 521 and transmission data having the second priority is transmitted to the mobile station 400 through the asynchronous slot 522. 213 may be controlled.
  • the first attribute may be “the above control data”, and the communication control unit 112 controls the wireless communication unit so that the transmission data is transmitted in the synchronization slot 521 when the transmission data is the control data.
  • 213 may be controlled.
  • the second attribute may be "data of a predetermined type different from the control data”.
  • the wireless communication unit 213 may be controlled to transmit by 522.
  • the communication control unit 112 controls which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the attributes of the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 112 acquires attribute information indicating attributes of transmission data from the controller 111 together with the transmission data. Based on the acquired attribute information, the communication control unit 112 attaches a tag representing the attribute of the transmission data to the transmission data, and stores the tagged transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 .
  • the wireless communication unit 213 controls which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the tag attached to the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 112 attaches a first tag to the transmission data when the transmission data has the first attribute and stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211, and attaches a second tag to the transmission data when the transmission data has the second attribute. and stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 .
  • Wireless communication section 213 transmits the transmission data to mobile station 400 using first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is tagged with the first tag, and transmits the transmission data to mobile station 400 when the transmission data is tagged with the second tag. Transmission data is transmitted to the mobile station 400 using the second type communication slot 510 .
  • the method of controlling which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the attributes of the transmission data is not limited to the method of tagging the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 112 determines in which communication slot 510 the transmission data is to be transmitted based on the attributes of the transmission data, and controls the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the determined communication slot 510 . may be controlled at the timing of storing in the transmission buffer 211 .
  • the base station 200 further has a timing notification section 221.
  • the timing notification unit 221 notifies the communication control unit 112 of the start timing of the time division duplex pattern.
  • the communication control unit 112 recognizes the execution timing of each communication slot 510 based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern, and adjusts the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the determined communication slot 510. It controls the timing of storing in the transmission buffer 211 .
  • the time division duplex pattern is not necessarily suitable for cyclic communication of application 3. Therefore, the communication system 1 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is one time division of wireless communication. and controlling cyclic communication to occur within a duplex pattern.
  • the communication control unit 112 controls cyclic communication such that at least part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of cyclic communication is performed within one time division duplex pattern of wireless communication. do.
  • the communication control unit 112 controls the timing of writing the transmission data to the transmission buffer 211 in each communication cycle so that at least part of each of the two or more communication cycles is performed within one time division duplex pattern. , and the timing of reading received data from the receive buffer 212 .
  • the communication control unit 112 selects a predetermined communication slot 510 among the communication slots 510 arranged between the first communication slot 510 and the last communication slot 510 in the time division duplex pattern.
  • the timing of storing the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 is controlled in each communication cycle so that one communication cycle among the communication cycles is started.
  • the predetermined communication slot 510 will be referred to as a "cycle start slot".
  • the communication control unit 112 recognizes the execution timing of the cycle start slot based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern acquired from the timing notification unit 221 .
  • the communication control unit 112 controls the timing of storing the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 in each communication cycle based on the execution timing of the cycle start slot so that the communication cycle 1 is started at the cycle start slot. .
  • the application 3 may perform cyclic communication in a constant communication cycle.
  • the application 3 may perform cyclic communication in the same communication cycle as the repeating cycle of the time division duplex pattern.
  • a "repetition cycle” is the time from the start timing of a time division duplex pattern to the start timing of the next time division duplex pattern.
  • a “communication cycle” is the time from the start timing of a communication cycle to the start timing of the next communication cycle.
  • the communication control unit 112 controls cyclic communication so that all communication cycles are started at the cycle start slot. If the repetition cycle and the communication cycle are equal, each communication cycle initiated at the cycle start slot will span two or more consecutive time division duplex patterns of wireless communication.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle when the repetition cycle and the communication cycle are equal.
  • the time division duplex pattern in FIG. 6 is the time division duplex pattern 500A described above.
  • the cycle start slot is the seventh communication slot 510, which is the downlink slot 511.
  • the communication control unit 112 repeats the communication cycle 611 that starts in the seventh communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500A and ends in the sixth communication slot 510 of the next time division duplex pattern 500A. to control cyclic communication.
  • 7 downlink slots 511, 1 special slot 513, and 2 uplink slots 512 are arranged in order. Therefore, according to the example of (a) of FIG. 6, the time division duplex pattern 500A can be used for cyclic communication in which the communication cycle in which the uplink slot 512 is arranged after the downlink slot 511 is repeated.
  • the cycle start slot is the fourth communication slot 510, which is the special slot 513.
  • communication control section 112 repeats communication cycle 612 that starts in the fourth communication slot 510 of time division duplex pattern 500A and ends in the third communication slot 510 of the next time division duplex pattern 500A. to control cyclic communication.
  • 1 special slot 513, 2 uplink slots 512, and 7 downlink slots 511 are arranged in order.
  • special slot 513 is also available as uplink slot 512 . Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 6B, the time division duplex pattern 500A can be used for cyclic communication in which the communication cycle in which the downlink slot 511 is arranged after the uplink slot 512 is repeated.
  • the cycle start slot is the sixth communication slot 510, which is the uplink slot 512.
  • the communication control unit 112 repeats the communication cycle 613 that starts in the sixth communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500A and ends in the fifth communication slot 510 of the next time division duplex pattern 500A. to control cyclic communication.
  • 1 uplink slot 512, 7 downlink slots 511, 1 special slot 513, and 1 uplink slot 512 are arranged in order. Therefore, according to the example of FIG.
  • the time division duplex pattern 500A is used for communication in which the downlink slot 511 is arranged after the uplink slot 512, and the uplink slot 512 is arranged after the downlink slot 511. It can be used for cyclic communication that repeats the cycle.
  • the application 3 may perform cyclic communication in one communication cycle, which is an integer (an integer equal to or greater than 2) of the repetition cycle.
  • an integer an integer equal to or greater than 2 of the repetition cycle.
  • the above integer is referred to as "multiplication number”.
  • the communication control unit 112 performs cyclic communication so that one communication cycle is started at the cycle start slot for each continuous communication cycle of the multiplication number. to control.
  • the communication control unit 112 transfers the transmission data to the transmission buffer 211 in each communication cycle so that one communication cycle is performed over two consecutive time division duplex patterns for each communication cycle of the consecutive multiplication number. You may control the timing to store.
  • one communication cycle initiated at the cycle start slot and one communication cycle conducted over two time division duplex patterns may be different.
  • the communication control unit 112 is configured so that the first communication cycle performed over two or more time division duplex patterns and the second communication cycle performed within one time division duplex pattern are included in the communication cycles of the multiplication number. cyclic communication may be controlled.
  • the communication control unit 112 may control cyclic communication so that the number of communication slots 510 used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number is equal.
  • the communication control unit 112 may control cyclic communication so that the number of uplink slots 512 used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number is equal to each other.
  • the communication control unit 112 may control cyclic communication such that the downlink slot 511 is followed by the uplink slot 512 in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
  • the communication control unit 112 establishes a synchronous communication cycle in which the arrangement of the uplink slots 512 and the downlink slots 511 matches that of other radio communication performed in parallel with the radio communication, and the uplink slots 512 and the downlink slots 511.
  • the cyclic communication may be controlled such that an asynchronous communication cycle that does not match other wireless communication is included in the multiplication number communication cycle.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle when the communication cycle is 1/multiple of the repetition cycle.
  • the multiplication factor in FIG. 7 is the wireless communication system 2, and the time division duplex pattern in FIG. 7 is the time division duplex pattern 500B described above.
  • the cycle start slot is the seventh communication slot 510, which is the downlink slot 511.
  • the communication control unit 112 sets the communication cycle 621 (first a communication cycle 631 (a second communication cycle) that begins in the second communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500B and ends in the sixth communication slot 510 of the same time division duplex pattern 500B; Control cyclic communication to alternately repeat
  • the number of communication slots 510 included in the communication cycle 621 and the number of communication slots 510 included in the communication cycle 631 are equal. Therefore, according to the example of (a) of FIG. 7, the same number of communication slots 510 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
  • the number of uplink slots 512 included in the communication cycle 621 and the number of uplink slots 512 included in the communication cycle 631 are equal. Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 7(a), the same number of uplink slots 512 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
  • the time division duplex pattern 500B is set to double the communication cycle in which the uplink slot 512 is arranged after the downlink slot 511 in the radio communication system of the time division duplex pattern. It can be used for repeated cyclic communication.
  • the communication cycle 621 includes a period T12, which is an asynchronous period, and the communication cycle 631 does not include an asynchronous period. Therefore, the communication cycle 621 corresponds to the asynchronous communication cycle, and the communication cycle 631 corresponds to the synchronous communication cycle.
  • the cycle start slot is the 9th communication slot 510 which is the uplink slot 512 .
  • the communication control unit 112 sets the communication cycle 622 (first a communication cycle 632 (a second communication cycle) that begins in the fourth communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500B and ends in the eighth communication slot 510 of the same time division duplex pattern 500B; Control cyclic communication to alternately repeat
  • the number of communication slots 510 included in communication cycle 622 is equal to the number of communication slots 510 included in communication cycle 632 . Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 7B, the same number of communication slots 510 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiple number.
  • the number of uplink slots 512 included in the communication cycle 622 and the number of uplink slots 512 included in the communication cycle 632 are equal. Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 7(b), the same number of uplink slots 512 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
  • the time division duplex pattern 500B is set to the time division duplex pattern, and the communication cycle in which the downlink slot 511 is arranged after the uplink slot 512 is doubled by the wireless communication system of the time division duplex pattern. It can be used for repeated cyclic communication.
  • the communication cycle 622 includes a period T12, which is an asynchronous period, and the communication cycle 632 does not include an asynchronous period. Therefore, the communication cycle 622 corresponds to the asynchronous communication cycle, and the communication cycle 632 corresponds to the synchronous communication cycle.
  • the cycle start slot is the tenth communication slot 510, which is the uplink slot 512.
  • the communication control unit 112 sets the communication cycle 623 (first a communication cycle 633 (a second communication cycle) that begins in the fifth communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500B and ends in the ninth communication slot 510 of the same time division duplex pattern 500B; Control cyclic communication to alternately repeat
  • the number of communication slots 510 included in the communication cycle 623 and the number of communication slots 510 included in the communication cycle 633 are equal. Therefore, according to the example of (c) in FIG. 7, the same number of communication slots 510 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
  • the time division duplex pattern 500B is used for communication in which the downlink slot 511 is arranged after the uplink slot 512, and the uplink slot 512 is arranged after the downlink slot 511. It can be used for cyclic communication in which the cycle is repeated in a time-division duplex pattern wireless communication system doubled.
  • both the communication cycle 623 and the communication cycle 633 include a period T12, which is an asynchronous period. Therefore, both the communication cycle 623 and the communication cycle 623 correspond to the asynchronous communication cycle.
  • a technique for controlling cyclic communication stores transmission data in a transmission buffer 211 such that at least a portion of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles occurs within one time division duplex pattern of wireless communication. It is not limited to the method of controlling the timing.
  • the communication control unit 112 attaches a tag designating the communication slot 510 corresponding to the communication cycle to the transmission data, stores the tagged transmission data in the transmission buffer 211, and the radio communication unit 213 attaches a tag to the transmission data. Based on the attached tag, the transmission data may be transmitted in the communication slot 510 corresponding to the communication cycle.
  • the communication system 1 sets the target arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in the communication cycle based on the configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, and the downlink slots 511 in each communication cycle. and controlling the cyclic communication to approximate the alignment of , and uplink slots 512 to a target alignment.
  • the control server 100 further has a goal setting unit 122.
  • the target setting unit 122 sets a target arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in the communication cycle based on the configuration information acquired by the configuration information acquisition unit 113 .
  • the target setting unit 122 may select the target array corresponding to the configuration of the device system 10 based on a lookup table that defines the target array for each of multiple configurations. In this case, the selected target array becomes the setting result of the target array.
  • the communication control unit 112 controls cyclic communication so that the arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in each communication cycle approximates the target arrangement.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the target arrangement and the arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the downlink slots 511 in each communication cycle.
  • FIG. 8 illustrates a case where a target array 620 is set in which two downlink slots 511 are followed by two uplink slots 512 .
  • the communication control unit 112 controls cyclic communication so as to alternately repeat the communication cycle 621 and the communication cycle 631 described above.
  • Special slots 513 are available as both downlink slots 511 and uplink slots 512 . Therefore, both the communication cycle 621 and the communication cycle 631 can be used as a communication cycle in which two downlink slots 511 are followed by two uplink slots 512 in the same manner as the target array 620 .
  • the communication system 1 may be configured to further evaluate communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 .
  • the communication system 1 may be configured to further evaluate communication quality in the asynchronous slots 522 .
  • the control server 100 further has a communication monitor 131 .
  • Communication monitor 131 evaluates communication quality in asynchronous slot 522 .
  • evaluating communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 is an example of evaluating communication quality in the asynchronous communication cycle.
  • the communication monitor 131 may evaluate the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 based on the communication packet loss rate in the asynchronous slot 522 . For example, the communication monitor 131 may evaluate whether the packet loss rate exceeds a predetermined degradation detection threshold, and detect degradation of communication quality when the packet loss rate exceeds the degradation detection threshold.
  • the communication monitor 131 may evaluate communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 based on the magnitude of communication jitter in the asynchronous slot 522 . For example, the communication monitor 131 may evaluate whether the magnitude of jitter exceeds a predetermined deterioration detection threshold, and detect deterioration of communication quality when the magnitude of jitter exceeds the deterioration detection threshold. .
  • the communication system 1 switches the normal mode radio communication to the irregular mode radio communication to cope with the deterioration of the communication quality when the deterioration of the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 is detected.
  • the normal mode wireless communication is, for example, the cyclic communication exemplified above.
  • Switching the normal mode to the irregular mode compensates for the change of the second pattern to the first pattern and the reduction in the number of uplink slots 512 that accompanies the change of the second pattern to the first pattern. lengthening the control cycle to increase the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to the control cycle.
  • the communication control unit 112 changes the second pattern to the first pattern when the communication monitor 131 detects deterioration in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 112 lengthens the control cycle so as to compensate for the decrease in the number of uplink slots 512 accompanying the change from the second pattern to the first pattern. Increase the number of patterns.
  • Switching the normal mode to the irregular mode lengthens the communication cycle, increases the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to one communication cycle, and transmits both the first attribute transmission data and the second attribute transmission data. It may include transmitting to the mobile station 400 in the first type communication slot 510 .
  • the communication control unit 112 lengthens the communication cycle of the cyclic communication and increases the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to one communication cycle. is increased, and the radio communication unit 213 is controlled so that both the first attribute transmission data and the second attribute transmission data are transmitted to the mobile station 400 in the synchronization slot 521 .
  • the communication control unit 112 lengthens the control cycle to increase the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to the control cycle. Less communication data may be sent by asynchronous slots 522 with more data.
  • the communication control unit 112 When the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 of the asynchronous communication cycle, the communication control unit 112 lengthens the communication cycle of the cyclic communication so that each communication cycle becomes a synchronous communication cycle. Cyclic communication may be controlled.
  • Switching the normal mode to the irregular mode may include increasing the transmission data transmitted by the first type communication slot 510 by compressing the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 112 compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute, and compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute.
  • the wireless communication unit 213 is controlled so that both of the transmission data of the second attribute are transmitted by the synchronization slot 521.
  • Switching the normal mode to the irregular mode may include at least partially suspending transmission of the second attribute transmission data through the second type communication slot 510 .
  • the communication control unit 112 causes the transmission of the second attribute transmission data in the asynchronous slot 522 to be at least partially interrupted. It controls the wireless communication unit 213 .
  • Switching from normal mode to irregular mode may include increasing the signal strength of wireless communication.
  • the communication control unit 112 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to increase the signal strength of wireless communication.
  • the communication system 1 may be configured to return the irregular mode to the normal mode when recovery of the communication quality that has been degraded is detected.
  • the communication system 1 is configured to evaluate the communication quality of the transmission data of the third attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 is not transmitted in the irregular mode.
  • the communication control unit 112 controls the wireless communication unit 213 so that the transmission data of the third attribute is transmitted to the mobile station 400 using the asynchronous slot 522.
  • the communication control unit 112 controls the transmission data of the third attribute to be transmitted to the mobile station 400 by the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute is not transmitted by the asynchronous slot 522.
  • the wireless communication unit 213 may be controlled.
  • the transmission data of the third attribute may be dummy data that is used only for communication quality evaluation.
  • the communication monitor 131 may evaluate the communication quality of the transmission data of the third attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 is not transmitted.
  • the communication control unit 112 may control the wireless communication unit 213 to return the irregular mode to the normal mode when the communication monitor 131 detects that the communication quality has recovered.
  • the communication system 1 replaces the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted by the second type communication slot 510 at the next time. It may be configured to retransmit in the second type communication slot 510 of the division duplex pattern. For example, when the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 112 sets the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 to the asynchronous data of the next time division duplex pattern. The wireless communication unit 213 is controlled so as to retransmit using the slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 112 transmits the second attribute transmission data transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 as a transmission target by the wireless communication unit 213. Leave in buffer 211 .
  • the transmission data left in the transmission buffer 211 is transmitted again from the wireless communication section 213 to the mobile station 400 at the asynchronous slot 522 of the next time division duplex pattern.
  • the communication system 1 may be configured to further evaluate the communication quality in the communication slot 510 of the first type. For example, the communication system 1 may be configured to further perform communication quality evaluation in the synchronization slot 521 . The communication system 1 may be configured to stop the application 3 and reset the wireless communication when the communication monitor 131 detects deterioration of communication quality in the first type communication slot 510 .
  • the communication monitor 131 further evaluates the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521.
  • the communication quality evaluation method is the same as the communication quality evaluation method for the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 112 suspends the application 3 when the communication monitor 131 detects deterioration of communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 .
  • the communication control unit 112 interrupts the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111 and stops the operation of the machines 20. .
  • the control server 100 further comprises a reset unit 132.
  • the reset unit 132 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to reset wireless communication after the communication control unit 112 stops the application 3 .
  • Radio communication section 213 resets radio communication with mobile station 400 in response to a request from reset section 132 .
  • the wireless communication unit 213 performs pairing (described later) with the mobile station 400 again.
  • FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of local controller 300 and mobile station 400. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the local controller 300 has a machine drive section 311 and a communication control section 312 as functional blocks.
  • the machine drive unit 311 drives the machine body 30 by repeating drive cycles including one or more communications from the controller 111 to the machine drive unit 311 and one or more communications from the machine drive unit 311 to the controller 111 .
  • the machine drive unit 311 receives the command data from the controller 111, outputs drive power to the machine body 30 according to the command data, and acquires response data representing the operation of the machine body 30 according to the drive power. and transmission of command data to the controller 111 are repeated.
  • the machine drive unit 311 outputs drive power to the machine body 30 for causing the machine body 30 to generate a target output according to the target output data.
  • the operation of the machine body 30 in accordance with the drive power is an example of the operation realized by the machine 20 in accordance with the command data.
  • the drive cycle is synchronized with the control cycle and includes the communication cycle.
  • the machine drive unit 311 causes the communication control unit 312 to receive reception data such as command data and transmit transmission data such as response data.
  • the machine drive unit 311 causes the communication control unit 312 to receive the received data, and acquires the received data received by the communication control unit 312 .
  • the machine drive unit 311 outputs transmission data to the communication control unit 312 and causes the communication control unit 312 to transmit the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 312 receives received data and transmits transmitted data via the mobile station 400 .
  • Mobile station 400 has transmission buffer 411 , reception buffer 412 , radio communication section 413 , and clock 414 .
  • the radio communication unit 413 repeats the time division duplex pattern to perform radio communication with the base station 200 (counterpart radio communication unit). For example, the wireless communication unit 413 reads out transmission data from the transmission buffer 411 and transmits the transmission data to the base station 200 using the uplink slots of the time division duplex pattern. Also, the wireless communication unit 413 receives reception data from the base station 200 using the downlink slot of the time division duplex pattern, and stores the reception data in the reception buffer 412 .
  • the communication control unit 312 stores the transmission data acquired from the machine driving unit 311 in the transmission buffer 411. As described above, the transmission data stored in transmission buffer 411 is read by wireless communication section 413 . Therefore, storing the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 is an example of handing over the transmission data to the wireless communication unit 413 .
  • the data stored in transmission buffer 411 is transmitted to controller 111 via mobile station 400 and base station 200 .
  • the communication control unit 312 reads the reception data received by the wireless communication unit 413 from the base station 200 from the reception buffer 412 .
  • Reading received data from the reception buffer 412 is an example of obtaining received data from the wireless communication unit 413 .
  • the reception data is received from the controller 111 via the base station 200 and the mobile station 400 by reading the reception data from the reception buffer 412 .
  • a clock 414 repeatedly generates the time necessary for repeating the time division duplex pattern.
  • the time generated by the clock 414 will be referred to as "mobile station time”.
  • Radio communication section 413 repeats the time division duplex pattern based on the mobile station time.
  • the wireless communication unit 413 executes a time-division duplex pattern each time a communication clock signal that notifies the passage of a certain repetition cycle is generated.
  • the communication performed between the generation of the communication clock signal and the generation of the next communication clock signal is one time division duplex pattern.
  • the wireless communication unit 213 of the base station 200 performs pairing when starting wireless communication with the wireless communication unit 413 . Pairing includes synchronizing the start timing of the time division duplex pattern. Radio communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern based on the base station time from the start timing synchronized by pairing. Radio communication section 413 repeats the time division duplex pattern based on the mobile station time from the start timing synchronized by pairing.
  • Pairing includes notification of the time division duplex pattern set by the communication pattern setting unit 114.
  • Wireless communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern notified in pairing.
  • the communication control unit 312 transmits the transmission data from the wireless communication unit 413 to the base station through the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data generated by the machine driving unit 311 has the first attribute. 200 , and when the transmission data generated by the machine driving section 311 has the second attribute, the transmission data may be transmitted from the wireless communication section 413 to the base station 200 using the second type communication slot 510 .
  • the first attribute may be the first priority
  • the second attribute may be the second priority lower than the first priority.
  • the communication control unit 312 performs radio communication so that transmission data having the first priority is transmitted to the base station 200 through the synchronous slot 521 and transmission data having the second priority is transmitted to the base station 200 through the asynchronous slot 522. 413 may be controlled.
  • the first attribute may be “the above control data”, and the communication control unit 312 controls the wireless communication unit so that the transmission data is transmitted in the synchronization slot 521 when the transmission data is the control data.
  • 413 may be controlled.
  • the second attribute may be "data of a predetermined type different from the control data”.
  • the wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled to transmit by 522.
  • the first attribute may be "abnormality notification data for notifying an abnormality of the machine 20". You may control the wireless communication part 413 so that it may transmit by .
  • the second attribute may be "notification data of a predetermined type with less urgency than the abnormality notification data”. If it is data, the wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled so that the transmission data is transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 312 controls which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the attributes of the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 312 acquires attribute information representing attributes of transmission data from the machine driving unit 311 together with the transmission data. Based on the acquired attribute information, the communication control unit 312 attaches a tag representing the attribute of the transmission data to the transmission data, and stores the tagged transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 .
  • the wireless communication unit 413 controls which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the tag attached to the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 312 attaches a first tag to the transmission data when it has a first attribute and stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411, and attaches a second tag to the transmission data when it has a second attribute. and stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 .
  • the wireless communication unit 413 transmits the transmission data to the base station 200 using the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is tagged with the first tag, and when the transmission data is tagged with the second tag. Transmission data is transmitted to the base station 200 using the second type communication slot 510 .
  • the method of controlling which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the attributes of the transmission data is not limited to the method of tagging the transmission data.
  • the communication control unit 312 determines in which communication slot 510 the transmission data is to be transmitted based on the attributes of the transmission data, and controls the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the determined communication slot 510 . may be controlled in the timing of storing in the transmission buffer 411 .
  • the mobile station 400 further has a timing notification section 421.
  • the timing notification unit 421 notifies the communication control unit 312 of the start timing of the time division duplex pattern.
  • the communication control unit 312 recognizes the execution timing of each communication slot 510 based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern, and adjusts the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the determined communication slot 510. It controls the timing of storing in the transmission buffer 411 .
  • the communication control unit 312 is configured so that at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of cyclic communication is performed within one time division duplex pattern of wireless communication. Cyclic communication may be controlled.
  • the communication control unit 312 cooperates with the communication control unit 112 to perform the cyclic communication.
  • a specific example of cyclic communication realized by the communication control unit 312 in cooperation with the communication control unit 112 is as described in detail in the explanation of the communication control unit 112 .
  • the communication control unit 112 of the control server 100 performs pairing when starting cyclic communication with the communication control unit 312 . Pairing involves signaling the relationship between the time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle. The communication control unit 312 repeats the communication cycle in cooperation with the communication control unit 112 so as to maintain the relationship between the notified time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle.
  • the pairing includes notification of the cycle start slot.
  • the communication control unit 312 recognizes the execution timing of the cycle start slot based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern acquired from the timing notification unit 421 . Based on the execution timing of the cycle start slot, the communication control unit 312 stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 in each communication cycle equal to the repetition cycle so that the one communication cycle is started at the cycle start slot. control when to
  • the pairing includes notification of the cycle start slot and the multiple number.
  • the communication control unit 312 recognizes the execution timing of the cycle start slot based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern acquired from the timing notification unit 421 . Based on the execution timing of the cycle start slot, the communication control unit 312 controls the transmission data in each communication cycle, which is 1/multiple of the repetition cycle, so that the one communication cycle is started in the cycle start slot. is stored in the transmission buffer 411.
  • the local controller 300 may further have a communication monitor 331 similar to the communication monitor 131 of the control server 100 .
  • Communication monitor 331 evaluates communication quality in asynchronous slot 522 .
  • evaluating communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 is an example of evaluating communication quality in the asynchronous communication cycle.
  • the communication monitor 331 may evaluate the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 based on the communication packet loss rate in the asynchronous slot 522 . For example, the communication monitor 331 may evaluate whether the packet loss rate exceeds a predetermined degradation detection threshold, and detect degradation of communication quality when the packet loss rate exceeds the degradation detection threshold.
  • the communication monitor 331 may evaluate communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 based on the magnitude of communication jitter in the asynchronous slot 522 . For example, the communication monitor 331 may evaluate whether or not the magnitude of jitter exceeds a predetermined deterioration detection threshold, and detect deterioration of communication quality when the magnitude of jitter exceeds the deterioration detection threshold. .
  • the communication control unit 312 may transmit a request for switching from the normal mode to the irregular mode to the communication control unit 112 when the communication monitor 331 detects that the communication quality has deteriorated in the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 112 may switch from the normal mode to the irregular mode in the same manner as when the communication monitor 131 detects the deterioration of the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522. good.
  • the communication control unit 312 controls the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute.
  • the wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled so that both attribute transmission data are transmitted to the base station 200 in the synchronization slot 521 .
  • the communication control section 312 may increase the communication data transmitted by the synchronous slot 521 and reduce the communication data transmitted by the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 312 compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute, and compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute.
  • the wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled so that both transmission data of two attributes are transmitted using the synchronization slot 521 .
  • the communication control unit 312 controls the wireless communication so that the transmission of the second attribute transmission data in the asynchronous slot 522 is at least partially interrupted.
  • the communication unit 413 may be controlled.
  • the communication control unit 312 may request the wireless communication unit 413 to increase the signal strength of the wireless communication when the communication monitor 331 detects the deterioration of the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 312 may control the wireless communication unit 413 so that the transmission data of the third attribute is transmitted to the base station 200 through the asynchronous slot 522.
  • the communication control unit 312 controls the transmission data of the third attribute to be transmitted to the base station 200 by the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute is not transmitted by the asynchronous slot 522.
  • the wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled.
  • the transmission data of the third attribute may be dummy data that is used only for communication quality evaluation.
  • the communication monitor 331 may evaluate the communication quality of the transmission data of the third attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 is not transmitted.
  • the communication control unit 312 may transmit a recovery request from the irregular mode to the normal mode to the communication control unit 112 when the communication monitor 331 detects that the communication quality has been restored.
  • the communication control unit 112 may switch from the normal mode to the irregular mode in the same manner as when the communication monitor 131 detects recovery of communication quality.
  • the communication control unit 312 may control the wireless communication unit 413 to return the irregular mode to the normal mode when the communication monitor 331 detects recovery of the degraded communication quality.
  • the communication system 1 changes the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted by the second type communication slot 510 at the next time. It may be configured to retransmit in the second type communication slot 510 of the division duplex pattern. For example, when the communication monitor 331 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 312 sets the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 to the asynchronous data of the next time division duplex pattern. The wireless communication unit 413 is controlled so as to retransmit using the slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 312 transmits the second attribute transmission data transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 as a transmission target by the wireless communication unit 413. Leave in buffer 411 .
  • the transmission data left in the transmission buffer 411 is transmitted again from the radio communication section 413 to the mobile station 400 by the asynchronous slot 522 of the next time division duplex pattern.
  • the communication monitor 331 may further evaluate the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521.
  • the communication quality evaluation method is the same as the communication quality evaluation method for the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • the communication control unit 312 suspends the application 3 when the communication monitor 331 detects deterioration of communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 .
  • the communication control unit 312 transmits a request to stop the plurality of machines 20 to the communication control unit 112 when the communication monitor 331 detects deterioration of communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 .
  • the communication control unit 112 that has received the stop request interrupts the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111 to stop the machines 20 .
  • the local controller 300 further comprises a reset section 332.
  • the reset unit 332 requests the wireless communication unit 413 to reset wireless communication after the communication control unit 312 stops the application 3 .
  • Radio communication section 413 resets radio communication with base station 200 in response to a request from reset section 332 .
  • the wireless communication unit 413 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to perform the pairing again.
  • FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware configuration of the control server 100 and base station 200. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the control server 100 has circuitry 190 . Circuit 190 includes a communication control circuit that controls the cyclic communication described above. Circuit 190 has processor 191 , memory 192 , storage 193 and communication port 194 .
  • the storage 193 is a non-volatile storage medium. Specific examples of the storage 193 include a hard disk, flash memory, and the like. The storage 193 may be a portable storage medium such as an optical disc. The storage 193 acquires configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, and according to the configuration of the device system 10, a time division duplex downlink slot and a time division duplex uplink slot. setting a time division duplex pattern that defines the arrangement of and repeating the set time division duplex pattern to perform wireless communication. good.
  • the storage 193 causes the base station 200 (wireless communication section) to transmit the transmission data to the mobile station 400 (counterpart wireless communication section) using the first type communication slot; causing the control server 100 to transmit the transmission data from the base station 200 (wireless communication unit) to the mobile station 400 (counterpart wireless communication unit) using the second type communication slot when the data has the second attribute.
  • the storage 193 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is a time division duplex pattern of 1 for wireless communication.
  • a program may be stored that causes the control server 100 to control cyclic communication, as is done within the control server 100 .
  • the storage 193 stores a program for causing the control server 100 to configure each functional block described above.
  • the memory 192 is a temporary storage medium such as random access memory, and temporarily stores programs loaded from the storage 193 .
  • the processor 191 is composed of one or more arithmetic elements, and executes a program loaded in the memory 192 to cause the control server 100 to configure each of the above functional blocks.
  • Communication port 194 communicates with time server 101 and base station 200 in response to requests from processor 191 .
  • the base station 200 has a circuit 290.
  • Circuit 290 has processor 291 , memory 292 , storage 293 and communication port 294 .
  • the storage 293 is a non-volatile storage medium. Specific examples of the storage 193 include a hard disk, flash memory, and the like. The storage 193 may be a portable storage medium such as an optical disc. Storage 293 stores a program for configuring each functional block described above in base station 200 .
  • the memory 292 is a temporary storage medium such as random access memory, and temporarily stores programs loaded from the storage 293 .
  • the processor 291 is composed of one or more arithmetic elements, and executes a program loaded in the memory 292 to cause the base station 200 to configure each of the above functional blocks.
  • Communication port 294 communicates with communication port 194 in response to requests from processor 291 .
  • Antenna 295 transmits and receives a signal for wireless communication according to a request from processor 291 .
  • FIG. 11 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware configuration of the local controller 300 and the mobile station 400.
  • local controller 300 includes circuitry 390 .
  • Circuitry 390 includes a communication control circuit that controls the cyclic communication described above.
  • Circuitry 390 includes processor 391 , memory 392 , storage 393 , communication port 394 and drive circuitry 395 .
  • the storage 393 is a non-volatile storage medium. Specific examples of the storage 393 include a hard disk, flash memory, and the like.
  • the storage 393 may be a portable storage medium such as an optical disc.
  • the storage 393 causes the mobile station 400 (radio communication section) to transmit the transmission data to the base station 200 (opponent radio communication section) using the first type communication slot; causing the local controller 300 to transmit the transmission data from the mobile station 400 (wireless communication unit) to the base station 200 (counterpart wireless communication unit) using the second type communication slot when the data has the second attribute. You may store a program to make it work.
  • the storage 393 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is a time division duplex pattern of 1 for wireless communication.
  • a program may be stored that causes the local controller 300 to control cyclic communication, as occurs within.
  • the storage 393 stores a program for causing the local controller 300 to configure each functional block described above.
  • the memory 392 is a temporary storage medium such as random access memory, and temporarily stores programs loaded from the storage 393 .
  • the processor 391 is composed of one or more arithmetic elements, and executes a program loaded in the memory 392 to cause the local controller 300 to configure each of the above functional blocks.
  • Communications port 394 communicates with mobile station 400 in response to requests from processor 391 .
  • the drive circuit 395 outputs drive power to the machine body 30 and acquires response data from the machine body 30 in response to a request from the processor 391 .
  • the mobile station 400 has a circuit 490.
  • Circuit 490 has processor 491 , memory 492 , storage 493 and communication port 494 .
  • the storage 493 is a non-volatile storage medium. Specific examples of the storage 493 include a hard disk, flash memory, and the like.
  • the storage 193 may be a portable storage medium such as an optical disc.
  • Storage 493 stores a program for configuring each functional block described above in mobile station 400 .
  • the memory 492 is a temporary storage medium such as random access memory, and temporarily stores programs loaded from the storage 493 .
  • the processor 491 is composed of one or more arithmetic elements, and executes a program loaded in the memory 492 to make the mobile station 400 configure each of the above functional blocks.
  • Communication port 494 communicates with communication port 494 in response to requests from processor 491 .
  • Antenna 495 transmits and receives a signal for wireless communication according to a request from processor 491 .
  • a communication procedure by the control server 100 and the base station 200 is illustrated as an example of the communication method. This procedure includes acquiring configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, setting a time division duplex pattern according to the configuration of the device system 10, setting the already set time division duplex pattern and repeating wireless communication.
  • this procedure is to transmit the transmission data from the radio communication unit 213 to the mobile station 400 using the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data has the first attribute, and to transmit the transmission data to the mobile station 400, and causing the wireless communication unit 213 to transmit the transmission data to the mobile station 400 using the second type communication slot 510 in the case where the transmission data is transmitted.
  • this procedure uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is one time-division multiplexing of wireless communication. and controlling cyclic communication to occur within a communication pattern.
  • step S ⁇ b>01 the configuration information acquisition unit 113 acquires configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10 from the multiple controllers 111 .
  • step S ⁇ b>02 the communication pattern setting section 114 sets a time division duplex pattern according to the configuration of the device system 10 .
  • step S03 the target setting unit 122 sets the target arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in the communication cycle.
  • step S04 the communication control unit 112 sets the cycle start slot so that the arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in each communication cycle approximates the target arrangement.
  • step S05 the configuration information acquisition unit 113 waits for the configuration of the device system 10 to change. After that, the control server 100 returns the process to step S01. By the above procedure, the control server 100 sets the time division duplex pattern and the cycle slot each time the configuration of the device system 10 changes.
  • step S11 the wireless communication unit 213 performs pairing with the wireless communication unit 413, and starts wireless communication according to the set time division duplex pattern.
  • step S ⁇ b>12 the wireless communication unit 213 checks whether the current communication slot 510 is the downlink slot 511 .
  • step S12 If it is determined in step S12 that the current communication slot 510 is the downlink slot 511, the base station 200 executes step S13.
  • step S13 the wireless communication unit 213 confirms whether the current communication slot 510 is the synchronization slot 521 or not.
  • step S14 the wireless communication unit 213 reads the transmission data for the synchronization slot 521 from the transmission buffer 211 based on the tag attached to the transmission data. For example, the wireless communication unit 213 reads the transmission data with the first attribute attached with the first tag from the transmission buffer 211 .
  • step S15 the wireless communication unit 213 reads the transmission data for the asynchronous slot 522 from the transmission buffer 211 based on the tag attached to the transmission data. For example, the wireless communication unit 213 reads the transmission data with the second attribute attached with the second tag from the transmission buffer 211 .
  • step S ⁇ b>16 wireless communication section 213 transmits the transmission data read from transmission buffer 211 to wireless communication section 413 .
  • step S ⁇ b>17 wireless communication section 213 confirms whether there is an acknowledge from wireless communication section 413 .
  • step S17 If it is determined in step S17 that there is an acknowledgment, the base station 200 executes steps S21 and S22.
  • step S ⁇ b>21 the wireless communication unit 213 deletes the transmitted transmission data from the transmission buffer 211 .
  • step S22 the wireless communication unit 213 notifies the communication monitor 131 of the jitter size based on the reception timing of the acknowledge.
  • step S17 If it is determined in step S17 that there is no acknowledge, the base station 200 executes step S23.
  • step S23 the wireless communication unit 213 notifies the communication monitor 131 of the occurrence of packet loss. After that, the base station 200 returns the process to step S12.
  • step S12 When it is determined in step S12 that the current communication slot 510 is the uplink slot 512, the base station 200 executes steps S31 and S32 as shown in FIG.
  • step S ⁇ b>31 wireless communication section 213 receives reception data from wireless communication section 413 .
  • step S32 the wireless communication unit 213 confirms whether or not the received data has been successfully received.
  • step S32 If it is determined in step S32 that the reception data has been successfully received, the base station 200 executes steps S33 and S34.
  • step S ⁇ b>33 wireless communication section 213 transmits an acknowledge to wireless communication section 413 .
  • step S ⁇ b>34 wireless communication section 213 stores the received data in reception buffer 212 . After that, the base station 200 returns the process to step S12.
  • step S32 If it is determined in step S32 that the received data could not be received normally, the base station 200 returns the process to step S12 without executing steps S33 and S34. By repeating the above procedure, the base station 200 performs communication for each communication slot in a time division manner.
  • step S41 the communication control unit 112 waits for the wireless communication unit 213 to start wireless communication.
  • step S ⁇ b>42 the communication control unit 112 waits for acquisition of transmission data from the controller 111 .
  • step S ⁇ b>43 the communication control unit 112 acquires attribute information of transmission data from the controller 111 .
  • step S44 the communication control unit 112 adds a tag representing the attribute of the transmission data to the transmission data based on the attribute information.
  • step S45 the communication control unit 112 confirms whether or not the transmission data is the first transmission data in the communication cycle.
  • step S45 If it is determined in step S45 that the transmission data is the first transmission data in the communication cycle, the control server 100 executes step S46. At step S46, the communication control unit 112 waits for the start timing of the next communication cycle.
  • step S47 the control server 100 executes step S47. If it is determined in step S45 that the transmission data is not the first transmission data in the communication cycle, the control server 100 executes step S47 without executing step S46. In step S ⁇ b>47 , the communication control unit 112 stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 . After that, the control server 100 returns the process to step S42.
  • the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication section 213 to the wireless communication section 413 through the communication slot 510 suitable for the attribute represented by the tag.
  • step S ⁇ b>51 the communication monitor 131 evaluates communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • step S52 the communication monitor 131 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 has deteriorated.
  • step S52 if no deterioration in communication quality is detected, the control server 100 returns the process to step S51. In step S52, when the deterioration of communication quality is detected, the control server 100 executes step S53. In step S53, the communication control unit 112 switches the normal mode to the irregular mode.
  • step S ⁇ b>54 the communication monitor 131 evaluates the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 and the communication quality in the synchronous slot 521 .
  • step S55 the communication monitor 131 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 has recovered.
  • step S55 if recovery of communication quality is not detected, the control server 100 executes step S56.
  • step S56 the communication monitor 131 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 has deteriorated.
  • step S56 if no deterioration in communication quality is detected, the control server 100 returns the process to step S54.
  • step S55 when recovery of communication quality is detected, the control server 100 executes step S57.
  • step S57 the communication control unit 112 switches the irregular mode to the normal mode.
  • step S56 if a decrease in communication quality is detected, the control server 100 executes steps S58 and S59.
  • step S58 when the communication monitor 131 detects that the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 is degraded, the communication control unit 112 interrupts the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111, and the operation of the machines 20 is stopped.
  • step S ⁇ b>59 the reset unit 132 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to reset wireless communication after the communication control unit 112 stops the machines 20 .
  • Radio communication section 213 resets radio communication with mobile station 400 in response to a request from reset section 132 .
  • step S57 or step S59 the control server 100 returns the process to step S51.
  • the control server 100 repeats the above procedure.
  • Communication procedure by local controller and mobile station As an example of the communication method, a communication procedure by the local controller 300 and the mobile station 400 is further illustrated. This procedure is to transmit the transmission data from the wireless communication unit 413 to the base station 200 using the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data has the first attribute, and to transmit the transmission data to the base station 200 when the transmission data has the second attribute. , causing transmission data to be transmitted from the wireless communication unit 413 to the base station 200 using the second type communication slot 510 .
  • this procedure uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is one time-division multiplexing of wireless communication. and controlling cyclic communication to occur within a communication pattern.
  • step S ⁇ b>111 wireless communication section 413 supports pairing by wireless communication section 213 and starts wireless communication according to the time division duplex pattern notified from wireless communication section 213 .
  • step S ⁇ b>112 the wireless communication unit 413 checks whether the current communication slot 510 is the uplink slot 512 .
  • step S112 If it is determined in step S112 that the current communication slot 510 is the uplink slot 512, the mobile station 400 executes step S113.
  • step S113 the wireless communication unit 413 confirms whether the current communication slot 510 is the synchronization slot 521 or not.
  • step S114 wireless communication section 413 reads transmission data for synchronous slot 521 from transmission buffer 411 based on the tag attached to the transmission data. For example, the wireless communication unit 413 reads the transmission data with the first attribute attached with the first tag from the transmission buffer 411 .
  • step S115 the wireless communication unit 413 reads the transmission data for the asynchronous slot 522 from the transmission buffer 411 based on the tag attached to the transmission data. For example, the wireless communication unit 413 reads the transmission data with the second attribute attached with the second tag from the transmission buffer 411 .
  • step S ⁇ b>116 the wireless communication unit 413 transmits the transmission data read from the transmission buffer 411 to the wireless communication unit 213 .
  • step S ⁇ b>117 wireless communication section 413 confirms whether there is an acknowledge from wireless communication section 213 .
  • step S117 If it is determined in step S117 that there is an acknowledgment, the mobile station 400 executes steps S121 and S122.
  • step S ⁇ b>121 wireless communication section 413 deletes the transmitted transmission data from transmission buffer 411 .
  • step S122 the wireless communication unit 413 notifies the communication monitor 331 of the magnitude of jitter based on the reception timing of the acknowledgment.
  • step S117 If it is determined in step S117 that there is no acknowledge, the mobile station 400 executes step S123.
  • step S123 the wireless communication unit 413 notifies the communication monitor 331 of occurrence of packet loss. After that, the mobile station 400 returns the process to step S112.
  • step S112 When it is determined in step S112 that the current communication slot 510 is the uplink slot 512, the mobile station 400 executes steps S131 and S132 as shown in FIG.
  • step S ⁇ b>131 wireless communication section 413 receives reception data from wireless communication section 213 .
  • step S132 wireless communication section 413 confirms whether or not the received data has been successfully received.
  • step S132 If it is determined in step S132 that the received data has been successfully received, the mobile station 400 executes steps S133 and S134.
  • step S ⁇ b>133 wireless communication section 413 transmits an acknowledge to wireless communication section 213 .
  • step S ⁇ b>134 wireless communication section 413 stores the received data in reception buffer 412 . After that, the mobile station 400 returns the process to step S112.
  • step S132 If it is determined in step S132 that the received data could not be received normally, the mobile station 400 returns the process to step S112 without executing steps S133 and S134. Mobile station 400 performs communication for each communication slot in a time division manner by repeating the above procedure.
  • step S141 the communication control unit 312 waits for the wireless communication unit 413 to start wireless communication.
  • step S ⁇ b>142 the communication control section 312 waits for acquisition of transmission data from the machine driving section 311 .
  • step S ⁇ b>143 the communication control section 312 acquires the attribute information of the transmission data from the machine driving section 311 .
  • step S144 communication control unit 312 adds a tag representing the attribute of the transmission data to the transmission data based on the attribute information.
  • step S145 the communication control unit 312 confirms whether or not the transmission data is the first transmission data in the communication cycle.
  • step S145 If it is determined in step S145 that the transmission data is the first transmission data in the communication cycle, the local controller 300 executes step S146. In step S146, the communication control unit 312 waits for the start timing of the next communication cycle.
  • step S147 the local controller 300 executes step S147. If it is determined in step S145 that the transmission data is not the first transmission data in the communication cycle, the local controller 300 executes step S147 without executing step S146. In step S ⁇ b>147 , the communication control unit 312 stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 . After that, the local controller 300 returns the process to step S142.
  • the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 413 to the wireless communication unit 213 through the communication slot 510 suitable for the attribute represented by the tag.
  • the control server 100 first executes steps S151 and S152.
  • step S ⁇ b>151 the communication monitor 331 evaluates communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 .
  • step S152 the communication monitor 331 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 has deteriorated.
  • step S152 if no deterioration in communication quality is detected, the local controller 300 returns the process to step S151.
  • the local controller 300 performs step S153.
  • step S153 the communication control unit 312 switches the normal mode to the irregular mode.
  • the communication control unit 312 may request the communication control unit 112 to switch the normal mode to the irregular mode.
  • step S ⁇ b>154 the communication monitor 331 evaluates the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 and the communication quality in the synchronous slot 521 .
  • step S155 the communication monitor 331 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 has recovered.
  • step S155 if recovery of communication quality is not detected, the local controller 300 executes step S156.
  • step S156 the communication monitor 331 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 has deteriorated.
  • step S156 if no deterioration in communication quality is detected, the local controller 300 returns the process to step S154.
  • step S155 when recovery of communication quality is detected, the local controller 300 executes step S157.
  • step S157 the communication control unit 312 switches the irregular mode to the normal mode.
  • the communication control section 312 may request the communication control section 112 to switch the irregular mode to the normal mode.
  • step S156 when the deterioration of communication quality is detected, the control server 100 executes steps S158 and S159.
  • step S158 when the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the synchronization slot 521, the communication control unit 312 suspends the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111, and the operation of the machines 20 is stopped. to stop For example, the communication control unit 312 transmits a request to stop the plurality of machines 20 to the communication control unit 112 when the communication monitor 331 detects deterioration of communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 .
  • the communication control unit 112 that has received the stop request interrupts the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111 to stop the machines 20 .
  • step S ⁇ b>159 the reset unit 332 requests the wireless communication unit 413 to reset wireless communication after the communication control unit 312 stops the machines 20 .
  • Radio communication section 413 resets radio communication with base station 200 in response to a request from reset section 332 .
  • the wireless communication unit 413 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to perform the pairing again.
  • step S157 or step S159 the local controller 300 returns the process to step S151.
  • the local controller 300 repeats the above procedure.
  • the wireless communication devices 5 and 6 repeat a time-division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots 510 including a first-type communication slot 510 and a second-type communication slot 510 are arranged in a time-division manner to perform wireless communication with the other party.
  • the transmission data generated by the wireless communication units 213 and 413 and the application 3 has the first attribute
  • the transmission data is wirelessly communicated through the first type communication slot 510. 213, 413 to the other party's wireless communication section 213, 413
  • the transmission data has the second attribute
  • the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication section 213, 413 to the other party's wireless communication section through the second type communication slot 510.
  • communication control units 112 and 312 that cause 213 and 413 to transmit.
  • the communication reliability of the plurality of communication slots 510 may differ depending on their position in the time division duplex pattern.
  • transmission data that requires transmission with high reliability is transmitted in the communication slot 510 with high reliability
  • transmission data that is allowed to be transmitted in low reliability is transmitted in the communication slot 510 with low reliability. can be sent by Therefore, it is effective in achieving both reliability of communication and communication speed.
  • Each of the plurality of communication slots 510 is a time division duplex downlink slot 511 or an uplink slot 512
  • the first type communication slot 510 is either the downlink slot 511 or the uplink slot 512.
  • the type 2 communication slot 510 is a downlink slot 511 or an uplink slot 512.
  • the wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so that transmission data having a second priority lower than the first priority is transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 using the second type communication slot 510. .
  • the wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so that transmission data having a second priority lower than the first priority is transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 using the second type communication slot 510.
  • the application 3 transmits and receives control data for controlling the industrial machine, and the communication control units 112 and 312 control the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is the control data.
  • the wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled. Control reliability can be improved.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 may control the wireless communication units 213 and 413 so that the transmission data is transmitted in the second type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is not control data. It is possible to achieve both reliability of control and speeding up of control.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 control the wireless communication units 213 and 413 so that the transmission data is transmitted in the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is abnormality notification data for notifying the abnormality of the industrial machine. may be controlled. Delays in coping with abnormalities in industrial machinery can be suppressed.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 control the wireless communication unit 213 so that the transmission data is transmitted in the second type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is less urgent notification data than the abnormality notification data. , 413 may be controlled. By allocating less urgent notification data to the second type communication slot 510, the first type communication slot 510 can be used more effectively.
  • Communication monitors 131 and 331 for evaluating communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 may be further provided. By evaluating the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510, which has lower communication reliability than the first type communication slot 510, it is possible to quickly detect the occurrence of deterioration in communication quality.
  • the communication control sections 112 and 312 request the wireless communication sections 213 and 413 to increase the signal strength of the wireless communication. may A decrease in communication quality can be easily eliminated.
  • the application 3 repeats a communication cycle including generation of transmission data based on the reception data received from the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 and transmission of the transmission data to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413.
  • 312 lengthens the communication cycle and increases the number of time-division duplex patterns corresponding to one communication cycle when the communication monitors 131 and 331 detect deterioration in communication quality in the second type communication slot 510.
  • the wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so that both the first attribute transmission data and the second attribute transmission data are transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 through the first type communication slot 510. .
  • a decrease in communication quality can be easily resolved.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 compress the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute
  • the wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so that both the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute are transmitted by the communication slot 510 of the first type. A decrease in communication quality can be easily resolved.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 control the wireless communication units 213 and 413 so that the transmission data of the third attribute is transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 through the second type communication slot 510, and the communication monitors 131 and 413 331 may evaluate the communication quality of the transmission data of the third attribute through the second type communication slot 510 when the transmission data of the second attribute through the second type communication slot 510 is not transmitted.
  • the evaluation of the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 is continued, and the slot for transmitting the transmission data of the second attribute is changed from the second type communication slot 510 to the first type communication slot 510 according to the improvement of the communication quality. can be quickly returned to
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 control the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted by the second type communication slot 510.
  • the radio communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so as to be transmitted again by the second type communication slot 510 of the next time division duplex pattern.
  • the second type communication slot 510 can be effectively used even when the communication quality is degraded.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 transmit transmission data of the second attribute through the second type communication slot 510.
  • the wireless communication unit 213, 413 may be controlled such that the communication is at least partially interrupted. It is possible to easily suppress erroneous data transmission by the second type communication slot 510 with deteriorated communication quality.
  • the communication monitors 131, 331 further evaluate the communication quality in the first type communication slot 510, and the communication control units 112, 312 detect the deterioration of the communication quality in the first type communication slot 510 by the communication monitors 131, 331.
  • the wireless communication devices 5 and 6 reset the wireless communication between the wireless communication units 213 and 413 and the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 after the application 3 is stopped.
  • a portion 132, 332 may also be provided. The continuation of poor communication can be easily avoided.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 attach the first tag to the transmission data when the transmission data has the first attribute, and deliver the transmission data to the wireless communication units 213 and 413.
  • the communication control units 112 and 312 attach the second tag to the transmission data. is attached to the transmission data to the wireless communication units 213 and 413, and the wireless communication units 213 and 413 transmit the transmission data to the other wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot 510 when the first tag is attached to the transmission data.
  • the transmission data may be transmitted to the communication units 213 and 413, and the transmission data may be transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 using the second type communication slot 510 when the second tag is attached to the transmission data. It is possible to easily control in which communication slot 510 the transmission data is transmitted by the tag attached to the transmission data.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

A radio communication device 5 or 6 includes: a radio communication unit 213 or 413 that performs radio communication with a target radio communication unit 213 or 413 by repeating a time division duplex pattern in which multiple communication slots 510 including a first class communication slot 510 and a second class communication slot 510 are time-division-multiplexed; and a communication control unit 112 or 312 that causes the radio communication unit 213 or 413 to transmit transmission data generated by an application 3 to the target radio communication unit 213 or 413 by using the first class communication slot 510 when the transmission data has a first attribute and causes the radio communication unit 213 or 413 to transmit the transmission data to the target radio communication unit 213 or 413 by using the second class communication slot 510 when the transmission data has a second attribute.

Description

無線通信装置及び通信方法Wireless communication device and communication method
 本開示は、無線通信装置及び通信方法に関する。 The present disclosure relates to wireless communication devices and communication methods.
 特許文献1には、ロボットと、加工装置と、ロボットを制御するロボットコントローラと、加工装置を制御する加工装置コントローラと、ロボットコントローラ及び加工装置コントローラに対する指令を生成するプログラマブルロジックコントローラとを備えるシステムが開示されている。 Patent Document 1 discloses a system including a robot, a processing device, a robot controller that controls the robot, a processing device controller that controls the processing device, and a programmable logic controller that generates commands for the robot controller and the processing device controller. disclosed.
特開2019-209454号公報JP 2019-209454 A
 本開示は、通信の信頼性と、通信速度との両立に有効な無線通信装置を提供する。 The present disclosure provides a wireless communication device that is effective in achieving both communication reliability and communication speed.
 本開示の一側面に係る無線通信装置は、第1種の通信スロットと、第2種の通信スロットとを含む複数の通信スロットを時分割で配列した時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、相手無線通信部との間で無線通信を行う無線通信部と、アプリケーションが生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合には、送信データを第1種の通信スロットにより無線通信部から相手無線通信部に送信させ、送信データが第2属性を有する場合には、送信データを第2種の通信スロットにより無線通信部から相手無線通信部に送信させる通信制御部と、を備える。 A wireless communication device according to one aspect of the present disclosure repeats a time division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots including a first type communication slot and a second type communication slot are arranged in a time division manner to When the transmission data generated by the wireless communication unit that performs wireless communication with the communication unit and the application has the first attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit to the remote wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot. and a communication control unit for transmitting the transmission data from the wireless communication unit to the other wireless communication unit using the second type communication slot when the transmission data has the second attribute.
 本開示の他の側面に係る通信方法は、第1種の通信スロットと、第2種の通信スロットとを含む複数の通信スロットを時分割で配列した時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、無線通信部と相手無線通信部との間で無線通信が行われている状態にて、アプリケーションが生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロットにより無線通信部から相手無線通信部に送信させることと、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロットにより無線通信部から相手無線通信部に送信させることと、を含む。 A communication method according to another aspect of the present disclosure repeats a time-division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots including a first-type communication slot and a second-type communication slot are arranged in a time-division manner to perform wireless communication. When the transmission data generated by the application has the first attribute while wireless communication is being performed between the unit and the other wireless communication unit, the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot. and causing the wireless communication unit to transmit the transmission data to the wireless communication unit using the second type communication slot when the transmission data has the second attribute.
 本開示によれば、通信の信頼性と、通信速度との両立に有効な無線通信装置を提供することができる。 According to the present disclosure, it is possible to provide a wireless communication device that is effective in achieving both communication reliability and communication speed.
デバイスシステムの構成を例示する模式図である。1 is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a device system; FIG. ロボットの構成を例示する模式図である。1 is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a robot; FIG. コントロールサーバ及び基地局の構成を例示するブロック図である。4 is a block diagram illustrating configurations of a control server and a base station; FIG. パターン記憶部の記憶内容を例示するテーブルである。4 is a table illustrating storage contents of a pattern storage unit; 時分割複信パターンを例示する模式図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating a time division duplex pattern; 時分割複信パターンと通信サイクルとの関係を例示する模式図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between time division duplex patterns and communication cycles; 時分割複信パターンと通信サイクルとの関係を例示する模式図である。FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between time division duplex patterns and communication cycles; 目標配列と、各通信サイクルにおける通信スロットの配列との関係を例示する模式図である。FIG. 3 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the target arrangement and the arrangement of communication slots in each communication cycle; ローカルコントローラ及び移動局の構成を例示するブロック図である。FIG. 4 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of a local controller and mobile station; コントロールサーバ及び基地局のハードウェア構成を例示するブロック図である。3 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware configuration of a control server and base stations; FIG. ローカルコントローラ及び移動局のハードウェア構成を例示するブロック図である。3 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware configuration of a local controller and mobile stations; FIG. 時分割複信パターン及びサイクル開始スロットの設定手順を例示するフローチャートである。4 is a flow chart illustrating a procedure for setting a time division duplex pattern and a cycle start slot; 無線通信手順を例示するフローチャートである。4 is a flow chart illustrating a wireless communication procedure; 無線通信手順を例示するフローチャートである。4 is a flow chart illustrating a wireless communication procedure; 通信制御手順を例示するフローチャートである。4 is a flowchart illustrating a communication control procedure; 通信モードの切り替え手順を例示するフローチャートである。7 is a flowchart illustrating a communication mode switching procedure; 無線通信手順を例示するフローチャートである。4 is a flow chart illustrating a wireless communication procedure; 無線通信手順を例示するフローチャートである。4 is a flow chart illustrating a wireless communication procedure; 通信制御手順を例示するフローチャートである。4 is a flowchart illustrating a communication control procedure; 通信モードの切り替え手順を例示するフローチャートである。7 is a flowchart illustrating a communication mode switching procedure;
 以下、実施形態について、図面を参照しつつ詳細に説明する。説明において、同一要素又は同一機能を有する要素には同一の符号を付し、重複する説明を省略する。 Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the explanation, the same reference numerals are given to the same elements or elements having the same function, and duplicate explanations are omitted.
〔通信システム〕
 図1に示す通信システム1は、時分割複信による無線通信を行うシステムである。通信システム1は、無線通信システム2と、アプリケーション3とを備える。無線通信システム2は、複数の通信スロットを時分割で配列した時分割複信パターンを繰り返して無線通信を行う。時分割で配列するとは、時間の経過を表す時間軸に沿って並ぶように配列することを意味する。
〔Communications system〕
A communication system 1 shown in FIG. 1 is a system that performs wireless communication using time division duplexing. A communication system 1 includes a wireless communication system 2 and an application 3 . The radio communication system 2 performs radio communication by repeating a time division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots are arranged in a time division manner. Arranging by time division means arranging so as to line up along a time axis representing the passage of time.
 時分割複信は、送信・受信を時間ごとに切り替えることによって、同一周波数帯域での送受信を可能にする無線通信方式である。無線通信システム2は、時分割複信による無線通信の一例として、5Gネットワークによる無線通信を行う。例えば無線通信システム2は、ローカル5Gによる無線通信を行う。ローカル5Gは、通信事業者が広域に通信サービスを提供するパブリック5Gに比較して、限定的なエリア向けに構築される5Gネットワークである。 Time division duplexing is a wireless communication method that enables transmission and reception in the same frequency band by switching transmission and reception for each time. The wireless communication system 2 performs wireless communication using a 5G network as an example of wireless communication using time division duplexing. For example, the radio communication system 2 performs radio communication by local 5G. Local 5G is a 5G network that is built for a limited area compared to public 5G, in which carriers provide communication services over a wide area.
 無線通信システム2は、基地局200と、1以上の移動局400とを有する。例えば無線通信システム2は、複数の移動局400を有する。基地局200は、ローカル5Gの対象エリアに設置され、複数の移動局400と無線通信を行う。複数の移動局400のそれぞれは、対象エリア内を移動可能であり、基地局200と無線通信を行う。 The wireless communication system 2 has a base station 200 and one or more mobile stations 400. For example, the radio communication system 2 has multiple mobile stations 400 . The base station 200 is installed in a local 5G target area and performs wireless communication with a plurality of mobile stations 400 . Each of the plurality of mobile stations 400 can move within the target area and wirelessly communicate with the base station 200 .
 無線通信における複数の通信スロットは、時分割複信のアップリンクスロットを含む。複数の通信スロットは、時分割複信のダウンリンクスロットを更に含んでいてもよい。アップリンクスロットは、移動局400が基地局200にデータを送信する(基地局200が移動局400からデータを受信する)スロットである。ダウンリンクスロットは、基地局200が移動局400にデータを送信する(移動局400が基地局200からデータを受信する)スロットである。 A plurality of communication slots in wireless communication includes time division duplex uplink slots. The plurality of communication slots may further include time division duplexed downlink slots. An uplink slot is a slot in which mobile station 400 transmits data to base station 200 (base station 200 receives data from mobile station 400). A downlink slot is a slot in which base station 200 transmits data to mobile station 400 (mobile station 400 receives data from base station 200).
 アプリケーション3は、無線通信システム2を利用してサイクリック通信を行う。サイクリック通信は、同じ内容のデータ送受信を繰り返す通信である。アプリケーション3は、無線通信システム2を利用して一定の通信サイクル(通信周期)のサイクリック通信を行ってもよい。アプリケーション3は、基地局200が移動局400から受信した受信データに基づく送信データの生成と、基地局200から移動局400への送信データの送信とを含む通信サイクルを繰り返してもよい。アプリケーション3は、移動局400が基地局200から受信した受信データに基づく送信データの生成と、移動局400から基地局200への送信データの送信とを含む通信サイクルを繰り返してもよい。 The application 3 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication. Cyclic communication is communication in which data transmission and reception of the same content are repeated. The application 3 may use the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication with a constant communication cycle (communication period). Application 3 may repeat a communication cycle including generation of transmission data based on reception data received by base station 200 from mobile station 400 and transmission of transmission data from base station 200 to mobile station 400 . Application 3 may repeat a communication cycle including generation of transmission data based on reception data received by mobile station 400 from base station 200 and transmission of transmission data from mobile station 400 to base station 200 .
 「アプリケーション」は、無線通信システム2による無線通信の適用対象を表す。アプリケーション3の具体例としては、複数のデバイスを含むデバイスシステム10が挙げられる。アプリケーション3がデバイスシステム10である場合、通信システム1は、デバイスシステム10において無線通信を行うこととなる。複数のデバイスのそれぞれは、一まとまりのハードウェアにより構成されるハードウェアデバイスであってもよく、ソフトウェアによりコンピュータに実装されるソフトウェアデバイスであってもよい。 "Application" represents an application target of wireless communication by the wireless communication system 2. A specific example of the application 3 is a device system 10 including multiple devices. When the application 3 is the device system 10 , the communication system 1 performs wireless communication in the device system 10 . Each of the plurality of devices may be a hardware device configured by a set of hardware, or may be a software device implemented in a computer by software.
 一例として、デバイスシステム10は、複数のマシン20と、コントロールサーバ100と、時刻サーバ101とを含む。マシン20は、ハードウェアデバイスの一例である。例えばマシン20は産業機械である。産業機械の具体例としては、工作機械、搬送装置、又はロボット等が挙げられる。サーボモータと、サーボドライブ回路とを含むサーボシステムも産業機械の一例である。 As an example, the device system 10 includes multiple machines 20, a control server 100, and a time server 101. Machine 20 is an example of a hardware device. For example, machine 20 is an industrial machine. Specific examples of industrial machines include machine tools, carrier devices, robots, and the like. A servo system including a servo motor and a servo drive circuit is also an example of an industrial machine.
 マシン20は、マシン本体30と、ローカルコントローラ300とを有する。マシン本体30は、動作を実現させる機械である。ローカルコントローラ300は、動作を実現させるようにマシン本体30を制御する。 The machine 20 has a machine body 30 and a local controller 300. The machine main body 30 is a machine that realizes operations. The local controller 300 controls the machine body 30 so as to implement the operations.
 マシン本体30の種類に特に制限はないが、図1には2種類のマシン本体30A,30Bを例示している。マシン本体30Aは、移動しながらワークに対する作業を行う移動型のロボットである。例えばマシン本体30Aは、無人搬送車31と、ロボット40とを有する。無人搬送車31は、ローカルコントローラ300により駆動されて移動する。 Although there are no particular restrictions on the type of machine body 30, two types of machine bodies 30A and 30B are illustrated in FIG. The machine body 30A is a mobile robot that works on a work while moving. For example, the machine main body 30A has an automatic guided vehicle 31 and a robot 40 . The automatic guided vehicle 31 is driven by the local controller 300 to move.
 ロボット40は、無人搬送車31の上に設置されている。ロボット40は、ローカルコントローラ300により駆動されて、ワークに対し搬送、加工、組立て等の作業を実行する。 The robot 40 is installed on the unmanned guided vehicle 31. The robot 40 is driven by the local controller 300 to carry out work such as transportation, processing, and assembly of the work.
 ロボット40は、例えば垂直多関節型の産業ロボットである。図2に示すように、ロボット40は、基部41と、旋回部42と、第1アーム43と、第2アーム44と、手首部45と、先端部46とを有する。基部41は、無人搬送車31の上に設置される。旋回部42は、鉛直な軸線51まわりに回転可能となるように基部41の上に取り付けられている。例えばロボット40は、旋回部42を軸線51まわりに回転可能となるように基部41に取り付ける関節61を有する。第1アーム43は、軸線51に交差(例えば直交)する軸線52まわりに回転可能となるように旋回部42に接続されている。例えばロボット40は、第1アーム43を軸線52まわりに回転可能となるように旋回部42に接続する関節62を有する。交差は、いわゆる立体交差のように、ねじれの関係にあることを含む。以下においても同様である。第1アーム43は、軸線52に交差(例えば直交)する一方向に沿って旋回部42から延びている。 The robot 40 is, for example, a vertically articulated industrial robot. As shown in FIG. 2 , the robot 40 has a base portion 41 , a turning portion 42 , a first arm 43 , a second arm 44 , a wrist portion 45 and a tip portion 46 . The base 41 is installed on the automatic guided vehicle 31 . The swivel part 42 is mounted on the base part 41 so as to be rotatable around the vertical axis 51 . For example, the robot 40 has a joint 61 that attaches the pivot 42 to the base 41 so as to be rotatable about the axis 51 . The first arm 43 is connected to the swivel portion 42 so as to be rotatable about an axis 52 that intersects (for example, is perpendicular to) the axis 51 . For example, the robot 40 has a joint 62 that connects the first arm 43 to the pivot 42 so as to be rotatable about the axis 52 . An intersection includes being in a twisted relationship, such as a so-called overpass. The same applies to the following. The first arm 43 extends from the turning portion 42 along one direction that intersects (for example, orthogonally) the axis 52 .
 第2アーム44は、軸線52に平行な軸線53まわりに回転可能となるように第1アーム43の端部に接続されている。例えばロボット40は、第2アーム44を軸線53まわりに回転可能となるように第1アーム43に接続する関節63を有する。第2アーム44は、軸線53に交差(例えば直交)する一方向に沿って第1アーム43の端部から延びるアーム基部47と、同じ一方向に沿ってアーム基部47の端部から更に延びるアーム端部48とを有する。アーム端部48は、アーム基部47に対して軸線54まわりに回転可能である。軸線54は、軸線53に交差(例えば直交)する。例えばロボット40は、アーム端部48を軸線54まわりに回転可能となるようにアーム基部47に接続する関節64を有する。 The second arm 44 is connected to the end of the first arm 43 so as to be rotatable around an axis 53 parallel to the axis 52 . For example, the robot 40 has a joint 63 connecting the second arm 44 to the first arm 43 so as to be rotatable about the axis 53 . The second arm 44 includes an arm base 47 extending from the end of the first arm 43 along one direction intersecting (for example, perpendicular to) the axis 53 and an arm further extending from the end of the arm base 47 along the same one direction. and end 48 . Arm end 48 is rotatable about axis 54 with respect to arm base 47 . Axis 54 intersects (eg, is orthogonal to) axis 53 . For example, robot 40 has a joint 64 that connects arm end 48 to arm base 47 such that arm end 48 is rotatable about axis 54 .
 手首部45は、軸線54に交差(例えば直交)する軸線55まわりに回転可能となるようにアーム端部48の端部に接続されている。例えばロボット40は、手首部45を軸線55まわりに回転可能となるようにアーム端部48に接続する関節65を有する。手首部45は、軸線55に交差(例えば直行)する一方向に沿ってアーム端部48の端部から延びている。先端部46は、軸線55に交差(例えば直交)する軸線56まわりに回転可能となるように、手首部45の端部に接続されている。例えばロボット40は、先端部46を軸線56まわりに回転可能となるように手首部45に接続する関節66を有する。先端部46にはエンドエフェクタが設けられる。エンドエフェクタの具体例としては、ワークを把持するハンド、ワークに対し加工、組み立て棟を行う作業ツール等が挙げられる。 The wrist 45 is connected to the end of the arm end 48 so as to be rotatable about an axis 55 that intersects (for example, is perpendicular to) the axis 54 . For example, the robot 40 has a joint 65 that connects the arm end 48 such that the wrist 45 is rotatable about the axis 55 . Wrist 45 extends from the end of arm end 48 along a direction that intersects (eg, is perpendicular to) axis 55 . The tip 46 is connected to the end of the wrist 45 so as to be rotatable about an axis 56 that intersects (eg, is perpendicular to) the axis 55 . For example, robot 40 has a joint 66 that connects tip 46 to wrist 45 such that tip 46 is rotatable about axis 56 . An end effector is provided at the distal end portion 46 . Specific examples of the end effector include a hand for gripping a work, a work tool for processing and assembling a work, and the like.
 アクチュエータ71,72,73,74,75,76は、関節61,62,63,64,65,66を駆動する。アクチュエータ71,72,73,74,75,76のそれぞれは、例えば電動モータと、電動モータの動力を関節61,62,63,64,65,66に伝える伝達部(例えば減速機)とを有する。例えばアクチュエータ71は、軸線51まわりに旋回部42を回転させるように関節61を駆動する。アクチュエータ72は、軸線52まわりに第1アーム43を回転させるように関節62を駆動する。アクチュエータ73は、軸線53まわりに第2アーム44を回転させるように関節63を駆動する。アクチュエータ74は、軸線54まわりにアーム端部48を回転させるように関節64を駆動する。アクチュエータ75は、軸線55まわりに手首部45を回転させるように関節65を駆動する。アクチュエータ76は、軸線56まわりに先端部46を回転させるように関節66を駆動する。 Actuators 71 , 72 , 73 , 74 , 75 , 76 drive joints 61 , 62 , 63 , 64 , 65 , 66 . Each of the actuators 71, 72, 73, 74, 75, 76 has, for example, an electric motor and a transmission section (for example, reduction gear) that transmits the power of the electric motor to the joints 61, 62, 63, 64, 65, 66. . For example, actuator 71 drives joint 61 to rotate pivot 42 about axis 51 . Actuator 72 drives joint 62 to rotate first arm 43 about axis 52 . Actuator 73 drives joint 63 to rotate second arm 44 about axis 53 . Actuator 74 drives joint 64 to rotate arm end 48 about axis 54 . Actuator 75 drives joint 65 to rotate wrist 45 about axis 55 . Actuator 76 drives joint 66 to rotate tip 46 about axis 56 .
 図1に戻り、マシン本体30Bは、ワーク等の搬送対象物を搬送する無人搬送車である。マシン本体30Bは、無人搬送車33と、荷置台34とを有する。無人搬送車33は、ローカルコントローラ300により駆動されて移動する。荷置台34は、無人搬送車33上に設けられ、搬送対象物を支持する。 Returning to FIG. 1, the machine main body 30B is an unmanned guided vehicle that transports objects such as workpieces. The machine main body 30B has an unmanned guided vehicle 33 and a loading platform 34. As shown in FIG. The automatic guided vehicle 33 is driven by the local controller 300 to move. The loading platform 34 is provided on the automatic guided vehicle 33 and supports the object to be transported.
 コントロールサーバ100は、複数のマシン20をそれぞれ制御する複数のコントローラ111を含む。複数のコントローラ111のそれぞれは、ソフトウェアデバイスの一例であり、ソフトウェアによりコントロールサーバ100に実装されている。複数のコントローラ111は、ハードウェア上において互いに独立したハードウェアデバイスであってもよい。 The control server 100 includes multiple controllers 111 that respectively control multiple machines 20 . Each of the multiple controllers 111 is an example of a software device, and is implemented in the control server 100 by software. The plurality of controllers 111 may be hardware devices independent of each other on hardware.
 通信システム1は、ダウンリンクスロットによってコントローラ111からマシン20への通信を行い、アップリンクスロットによってマシン20からコントローラ111への通信を行う、例えば、無線通信システム2の基地局200は、有線通信ネットワークを介してコントロールサーバ100に接続されている。無線通信システム2の複数の移動局400は、複数のマシン20にそれぞれ設けられており、複数のローカルコントローラ300にそれぞれ接続されている。コントロールサーバ100は、基地局200及び移動局400を介して複数のマシン20のそれぞれにデータを送信し、移動局400及び基地局200を介して複数のマシン20のそれぞれからデータを受信する。複数のローカルコントローラ300のそれぞれは、移動局400及び基地局200を介してコントロールサーバ100にデータを送信し、基地局200及び移動局400を介してコントロールサーバ100からデータを受信する。 Communication system 1 communicates from controller 111 to machine 20 via downlink slots and from machine 20 to controller 111 via uplink slots. is connected to the control server 100 via the . A plurality of mobile stations 400 of the radio communication system 2 are provided in a plurality of machines 20 respectively, and are connected to a plurality of local controllers 300 respectively. The control server 100 transmits data to each of the multiple machines 20 via the base station 200 and the mobile station 400 and receives data from each of the multiple machines 20 via the mobile station 400 and the base station 200 . Each of the plurality of local controllers 300 transmits data to the control server 100 via the mobile station 400 and base station 200 and receives data from the control server 100 via the base station 200 and mobile station 400 .
 アプリケーション3は、無線通信システム2を利用して、マシン20を制御するための制御データの送受信を行う。制御データの具体例としては、マシン20を制御するための指令データと、指令データに応じた産業機械の応答データとが挙げられる。 The application 3 uses the wireless communication system 2 to transmit and receive control data for controlling the machine 20 . Specific examples of the control data include command data for controlling the machine 20 and response data of the industrial machine according to the command data.
 指令データは、例えばマシン20に対する動作指令を表すデータである。動作指令を表すデータの具体例としては、マシン20の目標動作を表す目標動作データが挙げられる。目標データは、マシン20に対する目標位置、又は目標速度等を含む。動作指令を表すデータは、マシン20の動作を目標動作に追従させるための目標出力(例えば目標トルク又は目標電流)を表す目標出力データであってもよい。応答データは、例えば指令データに応じてマシン20が実現した動作を表すデータである。動作を表すデータの具体例としては、マシン20の動作速度、及びマシン20の位置等が挙げられる。 The command data is data representing an operation command for the machine 20, for example. A specific example of the data representing the motion command is target motion data representing the target motion of the machine 20 . The target data includes target positions, target velocities, etc. for the machine 20 . The data representing the operation command may be target output data representing a target output (for example, target torque or target current) for causing the operation of the machine 20 to follow the target operation. The response data is, for example, data representing an action performed by the machine 20 in response to command data. Specific examples of the data representing the motion include the motion speed of the machine 20, the position of the machine 20, and the like.
 例えばアプリケーション3は、コントローラ111からマシン20への指令データの送信と、マシン20からコントローラ111への応答データの送信とを含む通信サイクルをサイクリック通信により繰り返し実行する。これにより、コントローラ111は、指令データの送信と、応答データの受信とを含む通信サイクルをサイクリック通信により繰り返し実行することとなる。マシン20は、指令データの受信と、応答データの送信とを含む通信サイクルをサイクリック通信により繰り返し実行することとなる。 For example, the application 3 repeatedly executes a communication cycle including transmission of command data from the controller 111 to the machine 20 and transmission of response data from the machine 20 to the controller 111 by cyclic communication. As a result, the controller 111 repeatedly executes a communication cycle including transmission of command data and reception of response data by cyclic communication. The machine 20 repeatedly executes a communication cycle including reception of command data and transmission of response data by cyclic communication.
 時刻サーバ101は、有線通信ネットワークを介してコントロールサーバ100に接続されたコンピュータであり、グローバル時刻を生成する。時刻サーバ101は、コントロールサーバ100に組み込まれていてもよいし、基地局200に組み込まれていてもよい。グローバル時刻は、少なくともコントロールサーバ100の内部における時刻と、基地局200の内部における時刻とをグローバル時刻に合わせるのに用いられる。 The time server 101 is a computer connected to the control server 100 via a wired communication network and generates global time. The time server 101 may be incorporated in the control server 100 or may be incorporated in the base station 200 . The global time is used to align at least the time inside the control server 100 and the time inside the base station 200 with the global time.
 通信制御部112,312は、サイクリック通信を制御する。例えば通信制御部112は、サイクリック通信のうち、ダウンリンクスロットによる通信を制御する。通信制御部112と基地局200とは、ダウンリンクスロットによってコントローラ111からマシン20への通信を行う無線通信装置5を構成する。通信制御部312は、サイクリック通信のうち、ダウンリンクスロットによる通信を制御する。通信制御部312と移動局400とは、アップリンクスロットによってマシン20からコントローラ111への通信を行う無線通信装置6を構成する。 The communication control units 112 and 312 control cyclic communication. For example, the communication control unit 112 controls communication using a downlink slot among cyclic communications. The communication control unit 112 and the base station 200 constitute a wireless communication device 5 that performs communication from the controller 111 to the machine 20 using downlink slots. The communication control unit 312 controls communication using a downlink slot among cyclic communications. The communication control unit 312 and the mobile station 400 constitute a wireless communication device 6 that performs communication from the machine 20 to the controller 111 using uplink slots.
 一例として、通信制御部112はコントロールサーバ100に組み込まれており、通信制御部312はローカルコントローラ300に組み込まれている。上述したように、複数のコントローラ111が互いに独立したハードウェアデバイスである場合、複数のコントローラ111のそれぞれに通信制御部112が組み込まれていてもよい。通信制御部112が基地局200に組み込まれ、通信制御部312が移動局400に組み込まれていてもよい。 As an example, the communication control unit 112 is incorporated in the control server 100 and the communication control unit 312 is incorporated in the local controller 300. As described above, when the plurality of controllers 111 are hardware devices independent of each other, the communication control unit 112 may be incorporated in each of the plurality of controllers 111 . Communication control unit 112 may be incorporated in base station 200 and communication control unit 312 may be incorporated in mobile station 400 .
 デバイスシステム10において行われる無線通信では、ダウンリンクスロットにより情報を送信すべきタイミングと、アップリンクスロットにより情報を送信すべきタイミングとが、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションによって代わり得る。そこで、通信システム1は、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションを示すコンフィギュレーション情報を取得することと、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに応じて、時分割複信のダウンリンクスロットと、前記時分割複信のアップリンクスロットとの配列を定める時分割複信パターンを設定することと、設定済みの時分割複信パターンを繰り返して無線通信を行うことと、を実行するように構成されていてもよい。この構成によれば、デバイスシステムのコンフィギュレーションに応じて、時分割複信パターンが設定され、設定済みの時分割複信パターンを繰り返して無線通信が行われる。このため、よりタイムリーな無線通信を行うのに有効である。 In wireless communication performed in the device system 10, the timing at which information should be transmitted using the downlink slot and the timing at which information should be transmitted using the uplink slot can be changed depending on the configuration of the device system 10. Therefore, the communication system 1 acquires configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, and according to the configuration of the device system 10, the downlink slots for time division duplex and the time division duplex It may be configured to set a time division duplex pattern that defines an arrangement with uplink slots, and to perform wireless communication by repeating the set time division duplex pattern. According to this configuration, the time division duplex pattern is set according to the configuration of the device system, and wireless communication is performed by repeating the set time division duplex pattern. Therefore, it is effective for more timely wireless communication.
 時分割複信パターンを繰り返す場合、複数の通信スロットの通信の信頼性が、時分割複信パターンにおける位置によって互いに相違し得る。例えば、無線通信システム2が無線通信を行う空間と少なくとも部分的に重複する空間を介して、他の無線通信システム900が他の無線通信を行う場合がある。他の無線通信システム900は、複数の他の通信スロットを時分割で配列した他の時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、上記他の無線通信を行う。このような他の無線通信システム900の具体例としては、上述したパブリック5Gにより無線通信を行うシステムが挙げられる。 When the time division duplex pattern is repeated, the communication reliability of a plurality of communication slots may differ depending on the position in the time division duplex pattern. For example, other wireless communication systems 900 may perform other wireless communications via a space that at least partially overlaps the space in which the wireless communication system 2 wirelessly communicates. Another radio communication system 900 repeats another time division duplex pattern in which a plurality of other communication slots are arranged in a time division manner to perform the other radio communication. A specific example of such another wireless communication system 900 is a system that performs wireless communication by public 5G as described above.
 例えば他の無線通信システム900は、基地局910と、端末920とを有する。端末920は、例えばスマートフォン、タブレットコンピュータ、ラップトップコンピュータ等のモバイル通信端末である。基地局910は、通信事業者の通信ネットワークの末端に設置され、端末920との間で無線通信を行い、通信ネットワークと端末920との間の通信を中継する。 For example, another wireless communication system 900 has a base station 910 and a terminal 920 . Terminal 920 is, for example, a mobile communication terminal such as a smart phone, tablet computer, or laptop computer. The base station 910 is installed at the end of the communication network of the carrier, performs wireless communication with the terminal 920 , and relays communication between the communication network and the terminal 920 .
他の無線通信システム900が他の時分割複信パターンを繰り返して他の無線通 信を行う場合、無線通信システム2が繰り返す時分割複信パターンの複数の通信スロットには、同期スロットと、非同期スロットとが含まれ得る。同期スロットは、ダウンリンクスロットであるかアップリンクスロットであるかが、同じタイミングで行われる他の無線通信の通信スロットと一致する通信スロットである。非同期スロットは、ダウンリンクスロットであるかアップリンクスロットであるかが、同じタイミングで行われる他の無線通信の通信スロットと一致しない通信スロットである。同期スロットによる通信に比較して、非同期スロットによる通信では、他の無線通信の通信スロットによる通信との干渉によって、通信品質の低下が生じ易くなる。 When the other radio communication system 900 repeats another time division duplex pattern to perform other radio communication, the plurality of communication slots of the time division duplex pattern repeated by the radio communication system 2 include a synchronous slot and an asynchronous slot. slots. A synchronous slot is a communication slot whose status as a downlink slot or an uplink slot matches the communication slot of another wireless communication performed at the same timing. An asynchronous slot is a communication slot that does not match the communication slot of another wireless communication performed at the same timing in terms of whether it is a downlink slot or an uplink slot. Compared to communication using synchronous slots, communication using asynchronous slots is more susceptible to deterioration in communication quality due to interference with communication using communication slots of other wireless communications.
 このように、複数の通信スロットは、通信の信頼性が互いに異なる第1種の通信スロット(例えば同期スロット)と、第2種の通信スロット(例えば非同期スロット)とを含み得る。そこで、無線通信装置5は、コントローラ111が生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロットにより基地局200(無線通信部)から移動局400(相手無線通信部)に送信させることと、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロットにより基地局200(無線通信部)から移動局400(相手無線通信部)に送信させることと、を実行するように構成されていてもよい。 In this way, the plurality of communication slots can include first-type communication slots (for example, synchronous slots) and second-type communication slots (for example, asynchronous slots) with mutually different communication reliability. Therefore, when the transmission data generated by the controller 111 has the first attribute, the wireless communication device 5 transmits the transmission data from the base station 200 (wireless communication unit) to the mobile station 400 (counterpart wireless communication) using the first type communication slot. and if the transmission data has the second attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the base station 200 (wireless communication unit) to the mobile station 400 (counterpart wireless communication unit) using the second type communication slot. and may be configured to perform
 同様に、無線通信装置6は、マシン20が生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロットにより移動局400(無線通信部)から基地局200(相手無線通信部)に送信させることと、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロットにより移動局400(無線通信部)から基地局200(相手無線通信部)に送信させることと、を実行するように構成されていてもよい。 Similarly, when the transmission data generated by the machine 20 has the first attribute, the wireless communication device 6 transmits the transmission data from the mobile station 400 (wireless communication section) to the base station 200 (counterpart wireless) using the first type communication slot. communication unit), and when the transmission data has the second attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the mobile station 400 (wireless communication unit) to the base station 200 (counterpart wireless communication unit) using the second type communication slot. and may be configured to perform.
 時分割複信パターンは、必ずしもアプリケーションのサイクリック通信に適しているとは限らない。そこで、通信システム1は、無線通信システム2を利用して、サイクリック通信を行うことと、サイクリック通信の連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御することと、を実行するように構成されていてもよい。この構成によれば、時分割複信パターンを変更することなく、サイクリック通信の各通信サイクルにおける通信スロットの配列(以下、「スロット配列」という。)を調節することができる。従って、無線通信を様々なアプリケーションに応用するのに有効である。 The time division duplex pattern is not necessarily suitable for cyclic communication of applications. Therefore, the communication system 1 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is one time division of wireless communication. and controlling cyclic communication to occur within a duplex pattern. According to this configuration, the arrangement of communication slots in each communication cycle of cyclic communication (hereinafter referred to as "slot arrangement") can be adjusted without changing the time division duplex pattern. Therefore, it is effective in applying wireless communication to various applications.
 以下、コントロールサーバ100と、基地局200と、ローカルコントローラ300と、移動局400との構成をより詳細に例示する。 The configurations of the control server 100, the base station 200, the local controller 300, and the mobile station 400 will be illustrated in more detail below.
〔コントロールサーバ及び基地局の構成〕
 図3は、コントロールサーバ100及び基地局200の構成を例示するブロック図である。図3に示すように、コントロールサーバ100は、機能上の構成要素(以下、「機能ブロック」という。)として、複数のコントローラ111と、通信制御部112とを有する。複数のコントローラ111のそれぞれ(以下、単に「コントローラ111」という。)は、対応するマシン20を制御する。
[Configuration of control server and base station]
FIG. 3 is a block diagram illustrating configurations of the control server 100 and the base station 200. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 3, the control server 100 has a plurality of controllers 111 and a communication control unit 112 as functional components (hereinafter referred to as "functional blocks"). Each of the plurality of controllers 111 (hereinafter simply referred to as “controller 111 ”) controls the corresponding machine 20 .
 コントローラ111は、コントローラ111からマシン20への1以上の通信と、マシン20からコントローラ111への1以上の通信とを含む制御サイクルを繰り返して、マシン20を制御する。例えばコントローラ111は、マシン20からの上記応答データの受信と、応答データに基づく上記指令データの生成と、マシン20への指令データの送信と、を含む制御サイクルを繰り返す。例えばコントローラ111は、応答データにより表されるマシン20の動作を目標動作に追従させるための上記目標出力データを、指令データとして算出する。例えばコントローラ111は、目標動作とマシン20の動作との偏差に比例演算、比例・積分演算、又は比例・積分・微分演算等を行って目標出力データを算出する。 The controller 111 controls the machine 20 by repeating a control cycle including one or more communications from the controller 111 to the machine 20 and one or more communications from the machine 20 to the controller 111 . For example, the controller 111 repeats a control cycle including receiving the response data from the machine 20 , generating the command data based on the response data, and transmitting the command data to the machine 20 . For example, the controller 111 calculates, as command data, the target output data for causing the operation of the machine 20 represented by the response data to follow the target operation. For example, the controller 111 calculates target output data by performing a proportional operation, a proportional/integral operation, or a proportional/integral/differential operation on the deviation between the target operation and the operation of the machine 20 .
 コントローラ111は、一定の制御サイクル(制御周期)を繰り返す。例えばコントローラ111は、一定の制御サイクルの経過を通知する制御クロック信号が生成される度に制御サイクルを実行する。この場合、制御クロック信号の生成から、次の制御クロック信号の生成までの間にコントローラ111が実行する処理が、1の制御サイクルである。 The controller 111 repeats a constant control cycle (control period). For example, controller 111 executes a control cycle each time a control clock signal is generated that signals the passage of a certain control cycle. In this case, the processing executed by the controller 111 between the generation of the control clock signal and the generation of the next control clock signal is one control cycle.
 各制御サイクルにおいて、コントローラ111は、応答データの受信を、指令データの生成と、指令データの送信との後に実行してもよい。この場合、コントローラ111は、一つ前の制御サイクルにおいて受信した応答データに基づいて指令データを生成する。 In each control cycle, the controller 111 may receive response data after generating command data and transmitting command data. In this case, the controller 111 generates command data based on the response data received in the previous control cycle.
 各制御サイクルにおいて、コントローラ111は、応答データの受信と、指令データの生成とを、指令データの送信の後に実行してもよい。この場合、コントローラ111は、一つ前の制御サイクルにおいて生成した指令データを送信する。 In each control cycle, the controller 111 may receive the response data and generate the command data after sending the command data. In this case, the controller 111 transmits command data generated in the previous control cycle.
 制御サイクルは、通信サイクルを含む。通信サイクルは、指令データの送信と、応答データの受信とを含む。コントローラ111が、制御クロック信号が生成される度に制御サイクルを実行する場合、制御クロック信号の生成から、次の制御クロック信号の生成までの間にコントローラ111が実行する処理が、1の通信サイクルである。 A control cycle includes a communication cycle. A communication cycle includes sending command data and receiving response data. When the controller 111 executes a control cycle each time a control clock signal is generated, the processing executed by the controller 111 between the generation of the control clock signal and the generation of the next control clock signal is equivalent to one communication cycle. is.
 コントローラ111は、応答データ等の受信データの受信と、指令データ等の送信データの送信とを通信制御部112に実行させる。例えばコントローラ111は、受信データを通信制御部112に受信させ、通信制御部112が受信した受信データを取得する。また、コントローラ111は、送信データを通信制御部112に出力し、送信データの送信を通信制御部112に実行させる。 The controller 111 causes the communication control unit 112 to receive reception data such as response data and transmit transmission data such as command data. For example, the controller 111 causes the communication control unit 112 to receive the received data, and acquires the received data received by the communication control unit 112 . Further, the controller 111 outputs transmission data to the communication control section 112 and causes the communication control section 112 to transmit the transmission data.
 通信制御部112は、受信データの受信と、送信データの送信とを、基地局200を介して実行する。基地局200は、送信バッファ211と、受信バッファ212と、無線通信部213と、クロック214とを有する。無線通信部213は、上記時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、移動局400(相手無線通信部)との間で無線通信を行う。例えば無線通信部213は、送信バッファ211から送信データを読み出して、時分割複信パターンのダウンリンクスロットによって送信データを移動局400に送信する。また、無線通信部213は、時分割複信パターンのアップリンクスロットによって受信データを移動局400から受信し、受信データを受信バッファ212に格納する。 The communication control unit 112 receives received data and transmits transmitted data via the base station 200 . Base station 200 has transmission buffer 211 , reception buffer 212 , radio communication section 213 , and clock 214 . The radio communication unit 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern to perform radio communication with the mobile station 400 (counterpart radio communication unit). For example, the radio communication unit 213 reads transmission data from the transmission buffer 211 and transmits the transmission data to the mobile station 400 by downlink slots of the time division duplex pattern. Also, the wireless communication unit 213 receives reception data from the mobile station 400 in the uplink slot of the time division duplex pattern, and stores the reception data in the reception buffer 212 .
 通信制御部112は、コントローラ111から取得した送信データを、送信バッファ211に格納する。上述したように、送信バッファ211に格納された送信データは無線通信部213により読み出される。このため、送信バッファ211に送信データを格納することは、無線通信部213に送信データを引き渡すことの一例である。送信バッファ211に格納されたデータは、基地局200及び移動局400を介してマシン20に送信される。 The communication control unit 112 stores the transmission data acquired from the controller 111 in the transmission buffer 211. As described above, the transmission data stored in transmission buffer 211 is read by wireless communication section 213 . Therefore, storing the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 is an example of handing over the transmission data to the wireless communication unit 213 . Data stored in the transmission buffer 211 is transmitted to the machine 20 via the base station 200 and mobile station 400 .
 通信制御部112は、無線通信部213が移動局400から受信した受信データを受信バッファ212から読み出す。受信バッファ212から受信データを読み出すことは、無線通信部213から受信データを取得することの一例である。受信バッファ212から受信データを読み出すことによって、移動局400及び基地局200を介してマシン20から受信データが受信される。 The communication control unit 112 reads the reception data received by the wireless communication unit 213 from the mobile station 400 from the reception buffer 212 . Reading received data from the reception buffer 212 is an example of obtaining received data from the wireless communication unit 213 . Receive data is received from machine 20 via mobile station 400 and base station 200 by reading the receive data from receive buffer 212 .
 クロック214は、時分割複信パターンの繰り返しに必要な時刻を繰り返し生成する。以下、クロック214が生成する時刻を「基地局時刻」という。無線通信部213は、基地局時刻に基づいて時分割複信パターンを繰り返す。 The clock 214 repeatedly generates the time necessary for repeating the time division duplex pattern. Hereinafter, the time generated by the clock 214 will be referred to as "base station time". Radio communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern based on the base station time.
 例えば無線通信部213は、一定の繰り返しサイクルの経過を通知する通信クロック信号が生成される度に時分割複信パターンを実行する。この場合、通信クロック信号の生成から、次の通信クロック信号の生成までの間に行われる通信が、1の時分割複信パターンである。無線通信部213は、基地局時刻において、予め定められた開始時刻から繰り返しサイクルが経過する度に時分割複信パターンを実行してもよい。この場合、開始時刻に繰り返しサイクルの整数倍を加算した時刻から、1の繰り返しサイクルが経過するまでの間に行われる通信が、1の時分割複信パターンである。 For example, the wireless communication unit 213 executes a time division duplex pattern each time a communication clock signal that notifies the passage of a certain repetition cycle is generated. In this case, the communication performed between the generation of the communication clock signal and the generation of the next communication clock signal is one time division duplex pattern. Radio communication section 213 may execute the time division duplex pattern each time a repetition cycle elapses from a predetermined start time at the base station time. In this case, one time-division duplex pattern is communication performed from the time obtained by adding an integral multiple of the repetition cycle to the start time until one repetition cycle elapses.
 無線通信部213は、他の無線通信システム900が繰り返す他の時分割複信パターンに同期して時分割複信パターンを繰り返してもよい。この場合、クロック214は、上記グローバル時刻に同期した基地局時刻を生成するように構成されていてもよい。例えばクロック214は、有線通信ネットワークを介したTSN(Time Sensitive Networking)通信等、時刻同期性を保証する通信によって時刻サーバ101からグローバル時刻を受信し、受信したグローバル時刻に同期して基地局時刻を生成する。例えばクロック214は、基地局時刻をグローバル時刻に同期させた後、一定サイクルのクロックパルスのカウントによって基地局時刻を繰り返し更新する。クロック214は、基地局時刻をグローバル時刻に同期させることを、所定の時間間隔で繰り返し実行してもよい。 The radio communication unit 213 may repeat the time division duplex pattern in synchronization with another time division duplex pattern repeated by the other radio communication system 900 . In this case, clock 214 may be configured to generate base station time synchronized to the global time. For example, the clock 214 receives the global time from the time server 101 through communication that guarantees time synchronization, such as TSN (Time Sensitive Networking) communication via a wired communication network, and sets the base station time in synchronization with the received global time. Generate. For example, the clock 214 synchronizes the base station time to the global time, and then repeatedly updates the base station time by counting clock pulses at regular cycles. The clock 214 may repeatedly synchronize the base station time to the global time at predetermined time intervals.
 他の無線通信システム900においても、グローバル時刻に同期した時刻に基づいて、他の時分割複信パターンが繰り返される。無線通信部213は、グローバル時刻に同期した基地局時刻に基づいて、他の時分割複信パターンに同期して時分割複信パターンを繰り返す。例えば、無線通信システム900は、グローバル時刻に同期した時刻において、予め定められた開始時刻から繰り返しサイクルが経過する度に他の時分割複信パターンを実行する。無線通信部213も、グローバル時刻に同期した基地局時刻において、上記開始時刻から上記繰り返しサイクルが経過する度に時分割複信パターンを繰り返す。これにより、無線通信部213は、他の無線通信システム900が他の時分割複信パターンを開始する時刻と同じ時刻に時分割複信パターンを開始することとなる。 Also in other wireless communication systems 900, other time division duplex patterns are repeated based on the time synchronized with the global time. Radio communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern in synchronization with other time division duplex patterns based on the base station time synchronized with the global time. For example, the wireless communication system 900 executes another time division duplex pattern each time a repetition cycle elapses from a predetermined start time at a time synchronized to global time. The wireless communication unit 213 also repeats the time division duplex pattern every time the repetition cycle elapses from the start time at the base station time synchronized with the global time. As a result, the radio communication unit 213 starts the time division duplex pattern at the same time as the other radio communication system 900 starts another time division duplex pattern.
 上述したように、通信システム1は、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションを示すコンフィギュレーション情報を取得することと、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに応じて、時分割複信のダウンリンクスロットと、時分割複信のアップリンクスロットとの配列を定める時分割複信パターンを設定することと、設定済みの時分割複信パターンを繰り返して無線通信を行うことと、を実行するように構成されていてもよい。この場合、コントロールサーバ100は、コンフィギュレーション情報取得部113と、通信パターン設定部114とを更に備える。 As described above, the communication system 1 acquires the configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, and according to the configuration of the device system 10, the time division duplex downlink slot and the time division duplex slot. setting a time division duplex pattern that defines the alignment with the uplink slots of the communication; and repeating the set time division duplex pattern to perform wireless communication. . In this case, the control server 100 further comprises a configuration information acquisition section 113 and a communication pattern setting section 114. FIG.
 コンフィギュレーション情報取得部113は、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションを示すコンフィギュレーション情報を取得する。例えばコンフィギュレーション情報取得部113は、複数のコントローラ111からコンフィギュレーション情報を取得する。 The configuration information acquisition unit 113 acquires configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10. For example, the configuration information acquisition unit 113 acquires configuration information from multiple controllers 111 .
 通信パターン設定部114は、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに応じて、時分割複信のダウンリンクスロットと、時分割複信のアップリンクスロットとの配列を定める時分割複信パターンを設定する。通信パターン設定部114は、設定した時分割複信パターンを無線通信部213に通知する。無線通信部213は、通信パターン設定部114から通知された時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、上記無線通信を行う。 The communication pattern setting unit 114 sets a time division duplex pattern that defines the arrangement of time division duplex downlink slots and time division duplex uplink slots according to the configuration of the device system 10 . Communication pattern setting section 114 notifies wireless communication section 213 of the set time division duplex pattern. Radio communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern notified from communication pattern setting section 114 to perform the above-described radio communication.
 例えば通信パターン設定部114は、デバイスシステム10が第1コンフィギュレーションである場合には時分割複信パターンを第1パターンに設定し、デバイスシステム10が、第1コンフィギュレーションと異なる第2コンフィギュレーションである場合には、時分割複信パターンを、ダウンリンクスロットとアップリンクスロットとの配列が第1パターンと異なる第2パターンに設定する。 For example, the communication pattern setting unit 114 sets the time division duplex pattern to the first pattern when the device system 10 is in the first configuration, and the device system 10 is in the second configuration different from the first configuration. In some cases, the time division duplex pattern is set to a second pattern in which the arrangement of downlink slots and uplink slots is different from the first pattern.
 第2コンフィギュレーションは、第1コンフィギュレーションに比較して複数のマシン20から複数のコントローラ111への通信情報量が多いコンフィギュレーションであってもよい。この場合、通信パターン設定部114は、デバイスシステム10が第2コンフィギュレーションである場合に、時分割複信パターンを、第1パターンに比較してアップリンクスロットの数が多い第2パターンに設定してもよい。通信パターン設定部114は、デバイスシステム10が第2コンフィギュレーションである場合に、時分割複信パターンを、ダウンリンクスロットの数よりもアップリンクスロットの数が多い第2パターンに設定してもよい。 The second configuration may be a configuration with a larger amount of communication information from the multiple machines 20 to the multiple controllers 111 than the first configuration. In this case, when the device system 10 is in the second configuration, the communication pattern setting unit 114 sets the time division duplex pattern to the second pattern having a larger number of uplink slots than the first pattern. may When the device system 10 is in the second configuration, the communication pattern setting unit 114 may set the time division duplex pattern to a second pattern in which the number of uplink slots is greater than the number of downlink slots. .
 コンフィギュレーション情報は、複数のコントローラ111から複数のマシン20への通信量と、複数のマシン20から複数のコントローラ111への通信量との関係を示す通信構成情報を含んでいてもよい。この場合、通信パターン設定部114は、通信構成情報に基づいて時分割複信パターンを設定してもよい。 The configuration information may include communication configuration information indicating the relationship between the communication traffic from the controllers 111 to the machines 20 and the communication traffic from the machines 20 to the controllers 111 . In this case, the communication pattern setting section 114 may set the time division duplex pattern based on the communication configuration information.
 コンフィギュレーションは、デバイスシステム10のハードウェア構成を含んでいてもよい。例えば第1コンフィギュレーションは、第1ハードウェア構成を含み、第2コンフィギュレーションは第1ハードウェア構成とは異なる第2ハードウェア構成を含んでいてもよい。ハードウェア構成の違いの具体例としては、デバイスシステム10に含まれるマシン20の種類・数の違い等が挙げられる。 The configuration may include the hardware configuration of the device system 10. For example, the first configuration may include a first hardware configuration and the second configuration may include a second hardware configuration different from the first hardware configuration. Specific examples of differences in hardware configuration include differences in the types and numbers of machines 20 included in the device system 10 .
 コンフィギュレーションは、デバイスシステム10が実行する作業内容を含んでいてもよい。例えば第1コンフィギュレーションは、マシン20に第1タスクを実行させることを含み、第2コンフィギュレーションは、マシン20に第1タスクとは異なる第2タスクを実行させることを含んでいてもよい。タスクの違いの具体例としては、マシン20の動作により実現される作業の種類・回数の違い等が挙げられる。 The configuration may include work content to be executed by the device system 10. For example, a first configuration may involve having machine 20 perform a first task, and a second configuration may involve having machine 20 perform a second task that is different from the first task. Specific examples of differences in tasks include differences in the types and number of times of work realized by the operation of the machine 20 .
 コンフィギュレーション情報取得部113は、複数のコントローラ111により複数のマシン20が制御されている際に、コンフィギュレーション情報を取得し、通信パターン設定部114は、コンフィギュレーション情報が変化した場合、時分割複信パターンを変更してもよい。コンフィギュレーション情報が変化する場合の具体例としては、複数のコントローラ111が複数のマシン20に実行させるタスクの変化によって、複数のコントローラ111から複数のマシン20への単位時間あたりの通信量と、複数のマシン20から複数のコントローラ111への単位時間あたりの通信量との関係が変化することが挙げられる。 A configuration information acquisition unit 113 acquires configuration information when a plurality of machines 20 are controlled by a plurality of controllers 111, and a communication pattern setting unit 114 acquires configuration information when the configuration information changes. You may change your communication pattern. As a specific example of a case in which the configuration information changes, due to changes in the tasks that the plurality of controllers 111 cause the plurality of machines 20 to execute, the amount of communication per unit time from the plurality of controllers 111 to the plurality of machines 20 and the number of The relationship between the amount of communication per unit time from the machine 20 to the plurality of controllers 111 changes.
 通信パターン設定部114は、複数のコンフィギュレーションごとに、時分割複信パターンを定める参照テーブルに基づいて、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに対応する時分割複信パターンを選択してもよい。この場合、選択された時分割複信パターンが、通信パターン設定部114による時分割複信パターンの設定結果となる。例えばコントロールサーバ100は、参照テーブルを記憶するパターン記憶部115を更に有してもよい。通信パターン設定部114は、パターン記憶部115が記憶する参照テーブルにおいて、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに対応する時分割複信パターンを選択する。 The communication pattern setting unit 114 may select a time division duplex pattern corresponding to the configuration of the device system 10 based on a reference table that defines time division duplex patterns for each of a plurality of configurations. In this case, the selected time division duplex pattern becomes the setting result of the time division duplex pattern by the communication pattern setting unit 114 . For example, the control server 100 may further have a pattern storage unit 115 that stores reference tables. The communication pattern setting section 114 selects a time division duplex pattern corresponding to the configuration of the device system 10 in the reference table stored in the pattern storage section 115 .
 図4は、パターン記憶部115が記憶する参照テーブルを例示する。図4に例示される参照テーブルは、複数のコンフィギュレーションの識別情報に、複数の時分割複信パターンの識別情報をそれぞれ対応付けている。デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションが、図4における「コンフィギュレーションE」である場合、通信パターン設定部114は、「コンフィギュレーションE」に対応付けられた「パターン2」を選択する。 FIG. 4 illustrates a reference table stored by the pattern storage unit 115. FIG. The reference table illustrated in FIG. 4 associates identification information of a plurality of configurations with identification information of a plurality of time division duplex patterns, respectively. When the configuration of the device system 10 is "configuration E" in FIG. 4, the communication pattern setting unit 114 selects "pattern 2" associated with "configuration E".
 第1パターンは、他の無線通信システム900が実行する他の無線通信において繰り返される他の時分割複信パターンに一致していてもよい。第2パターンは、ダウンリンクスロットであるかアップリンクスロットであるかが他の時分割複信パターンの通信スロットに一致する同期スロットと、ダウンリンクスロットであるかアップリンクスロットであるかが他の時分割複信パターンの通信スロットに一致しない同期スロットと、非同期スロットとを含んでいてもよい。 The first pattern may match other time division duplex patterns repeated in other wireless communications performed by other wireless communication systems 900 . The second pattern consists of synchronization slots that match communication slots of other time division duplex patterns in terms of whether they are downlink slots or uplink slots, and synchronization slots that are different in terms of whether they are downlink slots or uplink slots. It may include synchronous slots and asynchronous slots that do not match the communication slots of the time division duplex pattern.
 図5は、時分割複信パターンを例示する模式図である。時分割複信パターン500Rは、上述したパブリック5Gにおける時分割複信パターンを表す。時分割複信パターン500Rにおいては、まず3のダウンリンクスロット511が時間軸に沿って配列され、その後に2のアップリンクスロット512が時間軸に沿って配列され、その後に4のダウンリンクスロット511が時間軸に沿って配列されている。上記3のダウンリンクスロット511と、上記2のアップリンクスロット512との間には、スペシャルスロット513が配列されている。スペシャルスロット513は、基地局200から移動局400への送信区間と、無送信区間と、移動局400から基地局200への送信区間とを順に含むスロットである。スペシャルスロット513は、ダウンリンクスロット511として利用可能であり、アップリンクスロット512としても利用可能である。 FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram illustrating a time division duplex pattern. A time division duplex pattern 500R represents the time division duplex pattern in public 5G described above. In the time division duplex pattern 500R, first three downlink slots 511 are arranged along the time axis, followed by two uplink slots 512 along the time axis, followed by four downlink slots 511. are arranged along the time axis. A special slot 513 is arranged between the 3 downlink slots 511 and the 2 uplink slots 512 . Special slot 513 is a slot that includes, in order, a transmission period from base station 200 to mobile station 400 , a non-transmission period, and a transmission period from mobile station 400 to base station 200 . Special slot 513 is available as downlink slot 511 and is also available as uplink slot 512 .
 時分割複信パターン500Aは、時分割複信パターン500Rに一致する第1パターンを例示する。時分割複信パターン500Bは、第2パターンを例示する。時分割複信パターン500Bにおいては、まず3のダウンリンクスロット511が時間軸に沿って配列され、その後に2のアップリンクスロット512が時間軸に沿って配列され、その後に1のアップリンクスロット512が配列され、その後に2のアップリンクスロット512が時間軸に沿って配列されている。上記3のダウンリンクスロット511と、これに続く上記2のアップリンクスロット512との間にはスペシャルスロット513が配列されている。上記1のダウンリンクスロット511と、これに続く上記2のアップリンクスロット512との間にもスペシャルスロット513が配列されている。 A time division duplex pattern 500A illustrates a first pattern that matches the time division duplex pattern 500R. Time division duplex pattern 500B illustrates the second pattern. In the time division duplex pattern 500B, first three downlink slots 511 are arranged along the time axis, then two uplink slots 512 are arranged along the time axis, and then one uplink slot 512 is arranged along the time axis. are arranged, followed by two uplink slots 512 arranged along the time axis. A special slot 513 is arranged between the 3 downlink slots 511 and the following 2 uplink slots 512 . A special slot 513 is also arranged between the 1 downlink slot 511 and the following 2 uplink slot 512 .
 時分割複信パターン500Bにおいては、ダウンリンクスロット511である1番目の通信スロット510から、ダウンリンクスロット511である7番目の通信スロット510までが、同期スロット521に相当する。また、スペシャルスロット513である8番目の通信スロット510も、同期スロット521として利用可能である。アップリンクスロット512である9番目及び10番目の通信スロット510は、非同期スロット522に相当する。 In the time division duplex pattern 500B, the first communication slot 510, which is the downlink slot 511, to the seventh communication slot 510, which is the downlink slot 511, correspond to the synchronization slot 521. Also, the eighth communication slot 510 , which is a special slot 513 , can also be used as a synchronization slot 521 . The ninth and tenth communication slots 510 , which are uplink slots 512 , correspond to asynchronous slots 522 .
 このため、時分割複信パターン500Bにおいては、1番目~8番目の通信スロット510が配列される期間T11が同期期間となり、9番目及び10番目の通信スロット510が配列される期間T12が非同期期間となる。 Therefore, in the time division duplex pattern 500B, the period T11 in which the first to eighth communication slots 510 are arranged is the synchronous period, and the period T12 in which the ninth and tenth communication slots 510 are arranged is the asynchronous period. becomes.
 時分割複信パターン500Cは、第2パターンの他の例を示す。時分割複信パターン500Cにおいては、まず2のダウンリンクスロット511が時間軸に沿って配列され、その後に7のアップリンクスロット512が時間軸に沿って配列されている。上記2のダウンリンクスロット511と、これに続く上記7のアップリンクスロット512との間にはスペシャルスロット513が配列されている。時分割複信パターン500Cにおいては、ダウンリンクスロット511である1番目及び2番目の通信スロット510と、アップリンクスロット512である4番目及び5番目の通信スロット510が同期スロット521に相当する。また、スペシャルスロット513である3番目のスペシャルスロット513も、同期スロット521として利用可能である。更に、アップリンクスロット512である3番目の通信スロット510も、同じタイミングで他の無線通信システム900により行われる通信スロット510がスペシャルスロット513であるため、同期スロット521として利用可能である。アップリンクスロット512である7番目~10番目の通信スロット510は、非同期スロット522に相当する。 A time division duplex pattern 500C shows another example of the second pattern. In time division duplex pattern 500C, first two downlink slots 511 are arranged along the time axis, followed by seven uplink slots 512 arranged along the time axis. A special slot 513 is arranged between the second downlink slot 511 and the following seven uplink slot 512 . In the time division duplex pattern 500C, the first and second communication slots 510, which are the downlink slots 511, and the fourth and fifth communication slots 510, which are the uplink slots 512, correspond to the synchronization slots 521. A third special slot 513 , which is a special slot 513 , is also available as a synchronization slot 521 . Furthermore, the third communication slot 510 which is the uplink slot 512 can also be used as a synchronization slot 521 because the communication slot 510 performed by another wireless communication system 900 at the same timing is a special slot 513 . The 7th to 10th communication slots 510 that are uplink slots 512 correspond to asynchronous slots 522 .
 このため、時分割複信パターン500Cにおいては、1番目~6番目の通信スロット510が配列される期間T21が同期期間となり、7番目~10番目の通信スロット510が配列される期間T22が非同期期間となる。 Therefore, in the time division duplex pattern 500C, the period T21 in which the first to sixth communication slots 510 are arranged is the synchronous period, and the period T22 in which the seventh to tenth communication slots 510 are arranged is the asynchronous period. becomes.
 非同期スロット522においては、同期スロット521に比較して、時分割複信パターン500Rの通信スロット510との干渉に起因して通信品質が低下し易くなる。そこで、同期スロット521は、上述した第1種の通信スロット510の一例であり、非同期スロット522は、上述した第2種の通信スロット510の一例である。 In the asynchronous slot 522, compared to the synchronous slot 521, the communication quality is more likely to deteriorate due to interference with the communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500R. Therefore, the synchronous slot 521 is an example of the first type communication slot 510 described above, and the asynchronous slot 522 is an example of the second type communication slot 510 described above.
 なお、「第1種」及び「第2種」は、通信スロット510の区別のために便宜上付与された語であるため、必ずしも同期スロット521が第1種の通信スロット510であり、非同期スロット522が第2種の通信スロット510でなくてよく、同期スロット521が第2種の通信スロット510であり、非同期スロット522が第1種の通信スロット510であってもよい。 Note that "first type" and "second type" are terms given for convenience to distinguish the communication slots 510, so the synchronous slot 521 is not necessarily the first type communication slot 510, and the asynchronous slot 522 is not necessarily the first type communication slot 510. may not be the second type communication slot 510 , the synchronous slot 521 may be the second type communication slot 510 and the asynchronous slot 522 may be the first type communication slot 510 .
時分割複信パターン500B又は時分割複信パターン500Cにより例示される ように、時分割複信パターンに第1種の通信スロット及び第2種の通信スロットが含まれる場合、通信制御部112は、コントローラ111が生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロット510により無線通信部213から移動局400に送信させ、コントローラ111が生成した送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロット510により無線通信部213から移動局400に送信させてもよい。 As exemplified by the time division duplex pattern 500B or the time division duplex pattern 500C, when the time division duplex pattern includes a first type communication slot and a second type communication slot, the communication control unit 112 When the transmission data generated by the controller 111 has the first attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 213 to the mobile station 400 using the first type communication slot 510, and the transmission data generated by the controller 111 has the second attribute. , the transmission data may be transmitted from the wireless communication unit 213 to the mobile station 400 using the second type communication slot 510 .
 「属性」とは、データの値によらず変わらないデータの性質を表す。属性の具体例としては、データの種別が挙げられる。データの種別とは、データの値が表す事象の種別である。事象の一例として「現在位置」を表すデータは、「現在位置」を表す値が変わったとしても、「現在位置」を表すデータであることに変わりはない。データの種別に応じて、データの優先度が定められる場合、当該優先度も属性の一例である。 "Attribute" represents the property of data that does not change regardless of the value of the data. A specific example of the attribute is the type of data. The data type is the type of event represented by the data value. Data representing the "current position" as an example of an event remains data representing the "current position" even if the value representing the "current position" changes. When the priority of data is determined according to the type of data, the priority is also an example of an attribute.
 第1属性は第1優先度であり、第2属性は第1優先度よりも低い第2優先度であってもよい。通信制御部112は、第1優先度を有する送信データが同期スロット521により移動局400に送信され、第2優先度を有する送信データが非同期スロット522により移動局400に送信されるように無線通信部213を制御してもよい。 The first attribute may be the first priority, and the second attribute may be the second priority lower than the first priority. The communication control unit 112 performs radio communication so that transmission data having the first priority is transmitted to the mobile station 400 through the synchronous slot 521 and transmission data having the second priority is transmitted to the mobile station 400 through the asynchronous slot 522. 213 may be controlled.
 第1属性は、「上記制御データであること」であってもよく、通信制御部112は、送信データが制御データである場合に、送信データが同期スロット521で送信されるように無線通信部213を制御してもよい。第2属性は、「上記制御データとは異なる所定種別のデータであること」であってもよく、通信制御部112は、送信データが上記所定種別のデータである場合に、送信データが非同期スロット522で送信されるように無線通信部213を制御してもよい。 The first attribute may be “the above control data”, and the communication control unit 112 controls the wireless communication unit so that the transmission data is transmitted in the synchronization slot 521 when the transmission data is the control data. 213 may be controlled. The second attribute may be "data of a predetermined type different from the control data". The wireless communication unit 213 may be controlled to transmit by 522.
 以上に例示したように、通信制御部112は、送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを、送信データの属性に基づいて制御する。このような制御を行うために、通信制御部112は、送信データの属性を表す属性情報を、送信データと共にコントローラ111から取得する。通信制御部112は、取得した属性情報に基づいて、送信データの属性を表すタグを送信データに付し、タグが付された送信データを送信バッファ211に格納する。無線通信部213は、送信データに付されたタグに基づいて、送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを制御する。 As illustrated above, the communication control unit 112 controls which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the attributes of the transmission data. In order to perform such control, the communication control unit 112 acquires attribute information indicating attributes of transmission data from the controller 111 together with the transmission data. Based on the acquired attribute information, the communication control unit 112 attaches a tag representing the attribute of the transmission data to the transmission data, and stores the tagged transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 . The wireless communication unit 213 controls which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the tag attached to the transmission data.
 例えば通信制御部112は、送信データが第1属性を有する場合に第1タグを付して送信データを送信バッファ211に格納し、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に第2タグを付して送信データを送信バッファ211に格納する。無線通信部213は、送信データに第1タグが付されている場合に第1種の通信スロット510により送信データを移動局400に送信し、送信データに第2タグが付されている場合に第2種の通信スロット510により送信データを移動局400に送信する。 For example, the communication control unit 112 attaches a first tag to the transmission data when the transmission data has the first attribute and stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211, and attaches a second tag to the transmission data when the transmission data has the second attribute. and stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 . Wireless communication section 213 transmits the transmission data to mobile station 400 using first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is tagged with the first tag, and transmits the transmission data to mobile station 400 when the transmission data is tagged with the second tag. Transmission data is transmitted to the mobile station 400 using the second type communication slot 510 .
 送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを、送信データの属性に基づいて制御する手法は、送信データにタグを付与する手法に限られない。例えば通信制御部112は、送信データの属性に基づいて、送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを決定し、決定済みの通信スロット510にて送信データが送信されるように、送信データを送信バッファ211に格納するタイミングを制御してもよい。 The method of controlling which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the attributes of the transmission data is not limited to the method of tagging the transmission data. For example, the communication control unit 112 determines in which communication slot 510 the transmission data is to be transmitted based on the attributes of the transmission data, and controls the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the determined communication slot 510 . may be controlled at the timing of storing in the transmission buffer 211 .
 この場合、基地局200は、タイミング通知部221を更に有する。タイミング通知部221は、時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングを通信制御部112に通知する。通信制御部112は、時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングに基づいて、各通信スロット510の実行タイミングを認識し、上記決定済みの通信スロット510にて送信データが送信されるように、送信データを送信バッファ211に格納するタイミングを制御する。 In this case, the base station 200 further has a timing notification section 221. The timing notification unit 221 notifies the communication control unit 112 of the start timing of the time division duplex pattern. The communication control unit 112 recognizes the execution timing of each communication slot 510 based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern, and adjusts the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the determined communication slot 510. It controls the timing of storing in the transmission buffer 211 .
 上述したように、時分割複信パターンは、必ずしもアプリケーション3のサイクリック通信に適しているとは限らない。そこで、通信システム1は、無線通信システム2を利用して、サイクリック通信を行うことと、サイクリック通信の連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御することと、を実行するように構成されていてもよい。 As described above, the time division duplex pattern is not necessarily suitable for cyclic communication of application 3. Therefore, the communication system 1 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is one time division of wireless communication. and controlling cyclic communication to occur within a duplex pattern.
 この場合、通信制御部112は、サイクリック通信の連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御する。例えば通信制御部112は、上記2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、各通信サイクルにおいて、送信データを送信バッファ211に書き込むタイミングと、受信データを受信バッファ212から読み出すタイミングとを制御する。例えば通信制御部112は、時分割複信パターンにおいて、最初の通信スロット510と最後の通信スロット510との間に配列される通信スロット510のうち、予め定められた通信スロット510において、2以上の通信サイクルのうち1の通信サイクルが開始されるように、各通信サイクルにおいて送信データを送信バッファ211に格納するタイミングを制御する。以下、上記予め定められた通信スロット510を、「サイクル開始スロット」という。 In this case, the communication control unit 112 controls cyclic communication such that at least part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of cyclic communication is performed within one time division duplex pattern of wireless communication. do. For example, the communication control unit 112 controls the timing of writing the transmission data to the transmission buffer 211 in each communication cycle so that at least part of each of the two or more communication cycles is performed within one time division duplex pattern. , and the timing of reading received data from the receive buffer 212 . For example, the communication control unit 112 selects a predetermined communication slot 510 among the communication slots 510 arranged between the first communication slot 510 and the last communication slot 510 in the time division duplex pattern. The timing of storing the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 is controlled in each communication cycle so that one communication cycle among the communication cycles is started. Hereinafter, the predetermined communication slot 510 will be referred to as a "cycle start slot".
 例えば通信制御部112は、タイミング通知部221から取得した時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングに基づいて、サイクル開始スロットの実行タイミングを認識する。通信制御部112は、サイクル開始スロットの実行タイミングに基づいて、上記1の通信サイクルが上記サイクル開始スロットにおいて開始されるように、各通信サイクルにおいて送信データを送信バッファ211に格納するタイミングを制御する。 For example, the communication control unit 112 recognizes the execution timing of the cycle start slot based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern acquired from the timing notification unit 221 . The communication control unit 112 controls the timing of storing the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 in each communication cycle based on the execution timing of the cycle start slot so that the communication cycle 1 is started at the cycle start slot. .
 上述したように、アプリケーション3は、一定の通信サイクルでサイクリック通信を行ってもよい。この場合、アプリケーション3は時分割複信パターンの繰り返しサイクルと同じ通信サイクルでサイクリック通信を行ってもよい。「繰り返しサイクル」は、時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングから、次の時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングまでの時間である。「通信サイクル」は、通信サイクルの開始タイミングから、次の通信サイクルの開始タイミングまでの時間である。 As described above, the application 3 may perform cyclic communication in a constant communication cycle. In this case, the application 3 may perform cyclic communication in the same communication cycle as the repeating cycle of the time division duplex pattern. A "repetition cycle" is the time from the start timing of a time division duplex pattern to the start timing of the next time division duplex pattern. A "communication cycle" is the time from the start timing of a communication cycle to the start timing of the next communication cycle.
 繰り返しサイクルと通信サイクルとが等しい場合、通信制御部112は、全ての通信サイクルが上記サイクル開始スロットにおいて開始されるようにサイクリック通信を制御する。繰り返しサイクルと通信サイクルとが等しい場合、サイクル開始スロットにおいて開始される各通信サイクルは、無線通信の連続する2以上の時分割複信パターンにわたって行われることとなる。 When the repetition cycle and the communication cycle are equal, the communication control unit 112 controls cyclic communication so that all communication cycles are started at the cycle start slot. If the repetition cycle and the communication cycle are equal, each communication cycle initiated at the cycle start slot will span two or more consecutive time division duplex patterns of wireless communication.
 図6は、繰り返しサイクルと通信サイクルとが等しい場合における、時分割複信パターンと通信サイクルとの関係を例示する模式図である。図6における時分割複信パターンは、上述した時分割複信パターン500Aである。 FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle when the repetition cycle and the communication cycle are equal. The time division duplex pattern in FIG. 6 is the time division duplex pattern 500A described above.
 図6の(a)においては、サイクル開始スロットが、ダウンリンクスロット511である7番目の通信スロット510とされている。この場合、通信制御部112は、時分割複信パターン500Aの7番目の通信スロット510において開始され、次の時分割複信パターン500Aの6番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル611を繰り返すようにサイクリック通信を制御する。通信サイクル611においては、7のダウンリンクスロット511、1のスペシャルスロット513、及び2のアップリンクスロット512が順に配列される。このため、図6の(a)の例によれば、時分割複信パターン500Aを、ダウンリンクスロット511の後にアップリンクスロット512が並ぶ通信サイクルを繰り返すサイクリック通信に利用可能である。 In FIG. 6(a), the cycle start slot is the seventh communication slot 510, which is the downlink slot 511. In FIG. In this case, the communication control unit 112 repeats the communication cycle 611 that starts in the seventh communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500A and ends in the sixth communication slot 510 of the next time division duplex pattern 500A. to control cyclic communication. In the communication cycle 611, 7 downlink slots 511, 1 special slot 513, and 2 uplink slots 512 are arranged in order. Therefore, according to the example of (a) of FIG. 6, the time division duplex pattern 500A can be used for cyclic communication in which the communication cycle in which the uplink slot 512 is arranged after the downlink slot 511 is repeated.
 図6の(b)においては、サイクル開始スロットが、スペシャルスロット513である4番目の通信スロット510とされている。この場合、通信制御部112は、時分割複信パターン500Aの4番目の通信スロット510において開始され、次の時分割複信パターン500Aの3番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル612を繰り返すようにサイクリック通信を制御する。通信サイクル612においては、1のスペシャルスロット513、2のアップリンクスロット512、及び7のダウンリンクスロット511が順に配列される。上述のように、スペシャルスロット513はアップリンクスロット512としても利用可能である。このため、図6の(b)の例によれば、時分割複信パターン500Aを、アップリンクスロット512の後にダウンリンクスロット511が並ぶ通信サイクルを繰り返すサイクリック通信に利用可能である。 In FIG. 6(b), the cycle start slot is the fourth communication slot 510, which is the special slot 513. In FIG. In this case, communication control section 112 repeats communication cycle 612 that starts in the fourth communication slot 510 of time division duplex pattern 500A and ends in the third communication slot 510 of the next time division duplex pattern 500A. to control cyclic communication. In the communication cycle 612, 1 special slot 513, 2 uplink slots 512, and 7 downlink slots 511 are arranged in order. As noted above, special slot 513 is also available as uplink slot 512 . Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 6B, the time division duplex pattern 500A can be used for cyclic communication in which the communication cycle in which the downlink slot 511 is arranged after the uplink slot 512 is repeated.
 図6の(c)においては、サイクル開始スロットが、アップリンクスロット512である6番目の通信スロット510とされている。この場合、通信制御部112は、時分割複信パターン500Aの6番目の通信スロット510において開始され、次の時分割複信パターン500Aの5番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル613を繰り返すようにサイクリック通信を制御する。通信サイクル613においては、1のアップリンクスロット512、7のダウンリンクスロット511、1のスペシャルスロット513、及び1のアップリンクスロット512が順に配列される。このため、図6の(c)の例によれば、時分割複信パターン500Aを、アップリンクスロット512の後にダウンリンクスロット511が並び、更にダウンリンクスロット511の後にアップリンクスロット512が並ぶ通信サイクルを繰り返すサイクリック通信に利用可能である。 In FIG. 6(c), the cycle start slot is the sixth communication slot 510, which is the uplink slot 512. In FIG. In this case, the communication control unit 112 repeats the communication cycle 613 that starts in the sixth communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500A and ends in the fifth communication slot 510 of the next time division duplex pattern 500A. to control cyclic communication. In the communication cycle 613, 1 uplink slot 512, 7 downlink slots 511, 1 special slot 513, and 1 uplink slot 512 are arranged in order. Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 6(c), the time division duplex pattern 500A is used for communication in which the downlink slot 511 is arranged after the uplink slot 512, and the uplink slot 512 is arranged after the downlink slot 511. It can be used for cyclic communication that repeats the cycle.
アプリケーション3は繰り返しサイクルの整数(2以上の整数)分の一の通信サ イクルでサイクリック通信を行ってもよい。以下、上記整数を「逓倍数」という。通信サイクルが繰り返しサイクルの逓倍数分の一である場合、通信制御部112は、連続する逓倍数の通信サイクルごとに、1の通信サイクルが上記サイクル開始スロットにおいて開始されるように、サイクリック通信を制御する。 The application 3 may perform cyclic communication in one communication cycle, which is an integer (an integer equal to or greater than 2) of the repetition cycle. Hereinafter, the above integer is referred to as "multiplication number". When the number of communication cycles is 1/multiplied number of repetition cycles, the communication control unit 112 performs cyclic communication so that one communication cycle is started at the cycle start slot for each continuous communication cycle of the multiplication number. to control.
 更に、通信制御部112は、連続する逓倍数の通信サイクルごとに、1の通信サイクルが、連続する2の時分割複信パターンにわたって行われるように、各通信サイクルにおいて送信データを送信バッファ211に格納するタイミングを制御してもよい。逓倍数の通信サイクルにおいて、サイクル開始スロットにおいて開始される1の通信サイクルと、2の時分割複信パターンにわたって行われる1の通信サイクルとは異なっていてもよい。例えば通信制御部112は、2以上の時分割複信パターンにわたって行われる第1通信サイクルと、1の時分割複信パターン内で行われる第2通信サイクルとが逓倍数の通信サイクルに含まれるようにサイクリック通信を制御してもよい。 Furthermore, the communication control unit 112 transfers the transmission data to the transmission buffer 211 in each communication cycle so that one communication cycle is performed over two consecutive time division duplex patterns for each communication cycle of the consecutive multiplication number. You may control the timing to store. In the multiplication number communication cycle, one communication cycle initiated at the cycle start slot and one communication cycle conducted over two time division duplex patterns may be different. For example, the communication control unit 112 is configured so that the first communication cycle performed over two or more time division duplex patterns and the second communication cycle performed within one time division duplex pattern are included in the communication cycles of the multiplication number. cyclic communication may be controlled.
 通信制御部112は、逓倍数の通信サイクルのそれぞれで使用される通信スロット510の数が互いに等しくなるように、サイクリック通信を制御してもよい。通信制御部112は、逓倍数の通信サイクルのそれぞれで使用されるアップリンクスロット512の数 が互いに等しくなるようにサイクリック通信を制御してもよい。通信制御部112は、逓倍数の通信サイクルのそれぞれにおいて、ダウンリンクスロット511の後にアップリンクスロット512が並ぶようにサイクリック通信を制御してもよい。通信制御部112は、アップリンクスロット512とダウンリンクスロット511との配列が、無線通信と並行して行われる他の無線通信と一致する同期通信サイクルと、アップリンクスロット512とダウンリンクスロット511との配列が、他の無線通信と一致しない非同期通信サイクルとが、逓倍数の通信サイクルに含まれるようにサイクリック通信を制御してもよい。 The communication control unit 112 may control cyclic communication so that the number of communication slots 510 used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number is equal. The communication control unit 112 may control cyclic communication so that the number of uplink slots 512 used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number is equal to each other. The communication control unit 112 may control cyclic communication such that the downlink slot 511 is followed by the uplink slot 512 in each communication cycle of the multiplication number. The communication control unit 112 establishes a synchronous communication cycle in which the arrangement of the uplink slots 512 and the downlink slots 511 matches that of other radio communication performed in parallel with the radio communication, and the uplink slots 512 and the downlink slots 511. The cyclic communication may be controlled such that an asynchronous communication cycle that does not match other wireless communication is included in the multiplication number communication cycle.
 図7は、通信サイクルが繰り返しサイクルの逓倍数分の一である場合における、時分割複信パターンと通信サイクルとの関係を例示する模式図である。図7における逓倍数は無線通信システム2であり、図7における時分割複信パターンは上述した時分割複信パターン500Bである。 FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle when the communication cycle is 1/multiple of the repetition cycle. The multiplication factor in FIG. 7 is the wireless communication system 2, and the time division duplex pattern in FIG. 7 is the time division duplex pattern 500B described above.
 図7の(a)においては、サイクル開始スロットが、ダウンリンクスロット511である7番目の通信スロット510とされている。この場合、通信制御部112は、時分割複信パターン500Bの7番目の通信スロット510において開始され、次の時分割複信パターン500Bの1番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル621(第1通信サイクル)と、時分割複信パターン500Bの2番目の通信スロット510において開始され、同じ時分割複信パターン500Bの6番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル631(第2通信サイクル)と、を交互に繰り返すようにサイクリック通信を制御する。通信サイクル621に含まれる通信スロット510の数と、通信サイクル631に含まれる通信スロット510の数とは等しい。このため、図7の(a)の例によれば、逓倍数の通信サイクルのそれぞれで同数の通信スロット510を使用可能である。 In FIG. 7(a), the cycle start slot is the seventh communication slot 510, which is the downlink slot 511. In FIG. In this case, the communication control unit 112 sets the communication cycle 621 (first a communication cycle 631 (a second communication cycle) that begins in the second communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500B and ends in the sixth communication slot 510 of the same time division duplex pattern 500B; Control cyclic communication to alternately repeat The number of communication slots 510 included in the communication cycle 621 and the number of communication slots 510 included in the communication cycle 631 are equal. Therefore, according to the example of (a) of FIG. 7, the same number of communication slots 510 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
 通信サイクル621に含まれるアップリンクスロット512の数と、通信サイクル631に含まれるアップリンクスロット512の数とは等しい。このため、図7の(a)の例によれば、逓倍数の通信サイクルのそれぞれで同数のアップリンクスロット512を使用可能である。 The number of uplink slots 512 included in the communication cycle 621 and the number of uplink slots 512 included in the communication cycle 631 are equal. Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 7(a), the same number of uplink slots 512 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
 通信サイクル621においては、1のダウンリンクスロット511、1のスペシャルスロット513、2のアップリンクスロット512、及び1のダウンリンクスロット511が順に配列される。通信サイクル631においては、2のダウンリンクスロット511、1のスペシャルスロット513、2のアップリンクスロット512が順に配列される。このため、図7の(a)の例によれば、時分割複信パターン500Bを、ダウンリンクスロット511の後にアップリンクスロット512が並ぶ通信サイクルを時分割複信パターンの無線通信システム2逓倍で繰り返すサイクリック通信に利用可能である。 In the communication cycle 621, 1 downlink slot 511, 1 special slot 513, 2 uplink slots 512, and 1 downlink slot 511 are arranged in order. In the communication cycle 631, two downlink slots 511, one special slot 513, and two uplink slots 512 are arranged in order. For this reason, according to the example of FIG. 7A, the time division duplex pattern 500B is set to double the communication cycle in which the uplink slot 512 is arranged after the downlink slot 511 in the radio communication system of the time division duplex pattern. It can be used for repeated cyclic communication.
 図7の(a)の例においては、通信サイクル621に非同期期間である期間T12が含まれ、通信サイクル631には非同期期間が含まれない。このため、通信サイクル621は上記非同期通信サイクルに相当し、通信サイクル631は上記同期通信サイクルに相当する。 In the example of (a) of FIG. 7, the communication cycle 621 includes a period T12, which is an asynchronous period, and the communication cycle 631 does not include an asynchronous period. Therefore, the communication cycle 621 corresponds to the asynchronous communication cycle, and the communication cycle 631 corresponds to the synchronous communication cycle.
 図7の(b)においては、サイクル開始スロットが、アップリンクスロット512である9番目の通信スロット510とされている。この場合、通信制御部112は、時分割複信パターン500Bの9番目の通信スロット510において開始され、次の時分割複信パターン500Bの3番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル622(第1通信サイクル)と、時分割複信パターン500Bの4番目の通信スロット510において開始され、同じ時分割複信パターン500Bの8番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル632(第2通信サイクル)と、を交互に繰り返すようにサイクリック通信を制御する。通信サイクル622に含まれる通信スロット510の数と、通信サイクル632に含まれる通信スロット510の数とは等しい。このため、図7の(b)の例によれば、逓倍数の通信サイクルのそれぞれで同数の通信スロット510を使用可能である。 In (b) of FIG. 7, the cycle start slot is the 9th communication slot 510 which is the uplink slot 512 . In this case, the communication control unit 112 sets the communication cycle 622 (first a communication cycle 632 (a second communication cycle) that begins in the fourth communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500B and ends in the eighth communication slot 510 of the same time division duplex pattern 500B; Control cyclic communication to alternately repeat The number of communication slots 510 included in communication cycle 622 is equal to the number of communication slots 510 included in communication cycle 632 . Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 7B, the same number of communication slots 510 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiple number.
 通信サイクル622に含まれるアップリンクスロット512の数と、通信サイクル632に含まれるアップリンクスロット512の数とは等しい。このため、図7の(b)の例によれば、逓倍数の通信サイクルのそれぞれで同数のアップリンクスロット512を使用可能である。 The number of uplink slots 512 included in the communication cycle 622 and the number of uplink slots 512 included in the communication cycle 632 are equal. Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 7(b), the same number of uplink slots 512 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
 通信サイクル622においては、2のアップリンクスロット512、及び3のダウンリンクスロット511が順に配列される。通信サイクル632においては、1のスペシャルスロット513、2のアップリンクスロット512、1のダウンリンクスロット511、及び1のスペシャルスロット513が順に配列される。このため、図7の(b)の例によれば、時分割複信パターン500Bを、アップリンクスロット512の後にダウンリンクスロット511が並ぶ通信サイクルを時分割複信パターンの無線通信システム2逓倍で繰り返すサイクリック通信に利用可能である。 In the communication cycle 622, 2 uplink slots 512 and 3 downlink slots 511 are arranged in order. In the communication cycle 632, one special slot 513, two uplink slots 512, one downlink slot 511, and one special slot 513 are arranged in order. For this reason, according to the example of FIG. 7B, the time division duplex pattern 500B is set to the time division duplex pattern, and the communication cycle in which the downlink slot 511 is arranged after the uplink slot 512 is doubled by the wireless communication system of the time division duplex pattern. It can be used for repeated cyclic communication.
 図7の(b)の例においては、通信サイクル622に非同期期間である期間T12が含まれ、通信サイクル632には非同期期間が含まれない。このため、通信サイクル622は上記非同期通信サイクルに相当し、通信サイクル632は上記同期通信サイクルに相当する。 In the example of FIG. 7(b), the communication cycle 622 includes a period T12, which is an asynchronous period, and the communication cycle 632 does not include an asynchronous period. Therefore, the communication cycle 622 corresponds to the asynchronous communication cycle, and the communication cycle 632 corresponds to the synchronous communication cycle.
 図7の(c)においては、サイクル開始スロットが、アップリンクスロット512である10番目の通信スロット510とされている。この場合、通信制御部112は、時分割複信パターン500Bの10番目の通信スロット510において開始され、次の時分割複信パターン500Bの4番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル623(第1通信サイクル)と、時分割複信パターン500Bの5番目の通信スロット510において開始され、同じ時分割複信パターン500Bの9番目の通信スロット510において終了する通信サイクル633(第2通信サイクル)と、を交互に繰り返すようにサイクリック通信を制御する。通信サイクル623に含まれる通信スロット510の数と、通信サイクル633に含まれる通信スロット510の数とは等しい。このため、図7の(c)の例によれば、逓倍数の通信サイクルのそれぞれで同数の通信スロット510を使用可能である。 In FIG. 7(c), the cycle start slot is the tenth communication slot 510, which is the uplink slot 512. In FIG. In this case, the communication control unit 112 sets the communication cycle 623 (first a communication cycle 633 (a second communication cycle) that begins in the fifth communication slot 510 of the time division duplex pattern 500B and ends in the ninth communication slot 510 of the same time division duplex pattern 500B; Control cyclic communication to alternately repeat The number of communication slots 510 included in the communication cycle 623 and the number of communication slots 510 included in the communication cycle 633 are equal. Therefore, according to the example of (c) in FIG. 7, the same number of communication slots 510 can be used in each communication cycle of the multiplication number.
 通信サイクル623においては、1のアップリンクスロット512、3のダウンリンクスロット511、及び1のスペシャルスロット513が順に配列される。通信サイクル633においては、2のアップリンクスロット512、1のダウンリンクスロット511、1のスペシャルスロット513、及び1のアップリンクスロット512が順に配列される。上述したように、スペシャルスロット513はアップリンクスロット512としても利用可能である。このため、図7の(c)の例によれば、時分割複信パターン500Bを、アップリンクスロット512の後にダウンリンクスロット511が並び、更にダウンリンクスロット511の後にアップリンクスロット512が並ぶ通信サイクルを時分割複信パターンの無線通信システム2逓倍で繰り返すサイクリック通信に利用可能である。 In the communication cycle 623, one uplink slot 512, three downlink slots 511, and one special slot 513 are arranged in order. In the communication cycle 633, 2 uplink slots 512, 1 downlink slot 511, 1 special slot 513, and 1 uplink slot 512 are arranged in order. As noted above, special slot 513 is also available as uplink slot 512 . Therefore, according to the example of FIG. 7C, the time division duplex pattern 500B is used for communication in which the downlink slot 511 is arranged after the uplink slot 512, and the uplink slot 512 is arranged after the downlink slot 511. It can be used for cyclic communication in which the cycle is repeated in a time-division duplex pattern wireless communication system doubled.
 図7の(b)の例においては、通信サイクル623及び通信サイクル633の両方に非同期期間である期間T12が含まれる。このため、通信サイクル623及び通信サイクル623の両方が、上記非同期通信サイクルに相当する。 In the example of (b) of FIG. 7, both the communication cycle 623 and the communication cycle 633 include a period T12, which is an asynchronous period. Therefore, both the communication cycle 623 and the communication cycle 623 correspond to the asynchronous communication cycle.
 連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御する手法は、送信データを送信バッファ211に格納するタイミングを制御する手法に限られない。例えば通信制御部112は、通信サイクルに対応する通信スロット510を指定するタグを送信データに付し、タグが付された送信データを送信バッファ211に格納し、無線通信部213は、送信データに付されたタグに基づいて、通信サイクルに対応する通信スロット510で送信データを送信してもよい。 A technique for controlling cyclic communication stores transmission data in a transmission buffer 211 such that at least a portion of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles occurs within one time division duplex pattern of wireless communication. It is not limited to the method of controlling the timing. For example, the communication control unit 112 attaches a tag designating the communication slot 510 corresponding to the communication cycle to the transmission data, stores the tagged transmission data in the transmission buffer 211, and the radio communication unit 213 attaches a tag to the transmission data. Based on the attached tag, the transmission data may be transmitted in the communication slot 510 corresponding to the communication cycle.
 通信システム1は、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションを示すコンフィギュレーション情報に基づいて、通信サイクルにおけるダウンリンクスロット511とアップリンクスロット512との目標配列を設定することと、各通信サイクルにおけるダウンリンクスロット511とアップリンクスロット512との配列を、目標配列に近似させるようにサイクリック通信を制御することと、を更に実行するように構成されていてもよい。 The communication system 1 sets the target arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in the communication cycle based on the configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, and the downlink slots 511 in each communication cycle. and controlling the cyclic communication to approximate the alignment of , and uplink slots 512 to a target alignment.
 例えばコントロールサーバ100は、目標設定部122を更に有する。目標設定部122は、コンフィギュレーション情報取得部113が取得したコンフィギュレーション情報に基づいて、通信サイクルにおけるダウンリンクスロット511とアップリンクスロット512との目標配列を設定する。目標設定部122は、複数のコンフィギュレーションごとに、目標配列を定める参照テーブルに基づいて、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに対応する目標配列を選択してもよい。この場合、選択された目標配列が、目標配列の設定結果となる。通信制御部112は、各通信サイクルにおけるダウンリンクスロット511とアップリンクスロット512との配列を、目標配列に近似させるようにサイクリック通信を制御する。 For example, the control server 100 further has a goal setting unit 122. The target setting unit 122 sets a target arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in the communication cycle based on the configuration information acquired by the configuration information acquisition unit 113 . The target setting unit 122 may select the target array corresponding to the configuration of the device system 10 based on a lookup table that defines the target array for each of multiple configurations. In this case, the selected target array becomes the setting result of the target array. The communication control unit 112 controls cyclic communication so that the arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in each communication cycle approximates the target arrangement.
 図8は、目標配列と、各通信サイクルにおけるダウンリンクスロット511とダウンリンクスロット511との配列と、の関係を例示する模式図である。図8は、2のダウンリンクスロット511の後に、2のアップリンクスロット512が並ぶ目標配列620が設定された場合を例示している。これに対し、通信制御部112は、上述した通信サイクル621と通信サイクル631とを交互に繰り返すようにサイクリック通信を制御する。スペシャルスロット513は、ダウンリンクスロット511及びアップリンクスロット512のいずれとしても利用可能である。このため、通信サイクル621及び通信サイクル631のいずれも、目標配列620と同様に、2のダウンリンクスロット511の後に、2のアップリンクスロット512が並ぶ通信サイクルとして利用可能である。 FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram illustrating the relationship between the target arrangement and the arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the downlink slots 511 in each communication cycle. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where a target array 620 is set in which two downlink slots 511 are followed by two uplink slots 512 . On the other hand, the communication control unit 112 controls cyclic communication so as to alternately repeat the communication cycle 621 and the communication cycle 631 described above. Special slots 513 are available as both downlink slots 511 and uplink slots 512 . Therefore, both the communication cycle 621 and the communication cycle 631 can be used as a communication cycle in which two downlink slots 511 are followed by two uplink slots 512 in the same manner as the target array 620 .
 通信システム1は、第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質を評価することを更に実行するように構成されていてもよい。例えば通信システム1は、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価することを更に実行するように構成されていてもよい。例えばコントロールサーバ100は、通信モニタ131を更に有する。通信モニタ131は、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価する。 The communication system 1 may be configured to further evaluate communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 . For example, the communication system 1 may be configured to further evaluate communication quality in the asynchronous slots 522 . For example, the control server 100 further has a communication monitor 131 . Communication monitor 131 evaluates communication quality in asynchronous slot 522 .
 逓倍数の通信サイクルが、同期通信サイクルと、非同期通信サイクルとを含む場合、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価することは、非同期通信サイクルにおける通信品質を評価することの一例である。 When the multiplication number communication cycle includes a synchronous communication cycle and an asynchronous communication cycle, evaluating communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 is an example of evaluating communication quality in the asynchronous communication cycle.
 例えば通信モニタ131は、非同期スロット522における通信のパケットのロス率に基づいて、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価してもよい。例えば通信モニタ131は、パケットロス率が所定の低下検出閾値を超えているか否かを評価し、パケットロス率が低下検出閾値を超えた場合に、通信品質の低下を検出してもよい。 For example, the communication monitor 131 may evaluate the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 based on the communication packet loss rate in the asynchronous slot 522 . For example, the communication monitor 131 may evaluate whether the packet loss rate exceeds a predetermined degradation detection threshold, and detect degradation of communication quality when the packet loss rate exceeds the degradation detection threshold.
 通信モニタ131は、非同期スロット522における通信のジッタの大きさに基づいて、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価してもよい。例えば通信モニタ131は、ジッタの大きさが所定の低下検出閾値を超えているか否かを評価し、ジッタの大きさが低下検出閾値を超えた場合に、通信品質の低下を検出してもよい。 The communication monitor 131 may evaluate communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 based on the magnitude of communication jitter in the asynchronous slot 522 . For example, the communication monitor 131 may evaluate whether the magnitude of jitter exceeds a predetermined deterioration detection threshold, and detect deterioration of communication quality when the magnitude of jitter exceeds the deterioration detection threshold. .
 通信システム1は、第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、通常モードの無線通信を、通信品質の低下に対応するためのイレギュラーモードの無線通信に切り替えるように構成されていてもよい。通常モードの無線通信は、例えば以上に例示したサイクリック通信である。 The communication system 1 switches the normal mode radio communication to the irregular mode radio communication to cope with the deterioration of the communication quality when the deterioration of the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 is detected. may be configured. The normal mode wireless communication is, for example, the cyclic communication exemplified above.
 通常モードをイレギュラーモードに切り替えることは、上記第2パターンを第1パターンに変更することと、第2パターンが第1パターンに変更されるのに伴うアップリンクスロット512の数の減少を補うように、制御サイクルを長くして制御サイクルに対応する時分割複信パターンの数を増やすことと、を含んでいてもよい。 Switching the normal mode to the irregular mode compensates for the change of the second pattern to the first pattern and the reduction in the number of uplink slots 512 that accompanies the change of the second pattern to the first pattern. lengthening the control cycle to increase the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to the control cycle.
 例えば通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、第2パターンを第1パターンに変更する。また、通信制御部112は、第2パターンが第1パターンに変更されるのに伴うアップリンクスロット512の数の減少を補うように、制御サイクルを長くして制御サイクルに対応する時分割複信パターンの数を増やす。 For example, the communication control unit 112 changes the second pattern to the first pattern when the communication monitor 131 detects deterioration in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 . In addition, the communication control unit 112 lengthens the control cycle so as to compensate for the decrease in the number of uplink slots 512 accompanying the change from the second pattern to the first pattern. Increase the number of patterns.
 通常モードをイレギュラーモードに切り替えることは、通信サイクルを長くして1の通信サイクルに対応する時分割複信パターンの数を増やし、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データの両方を第1種の通信スロット510により移動局400に送信することを含んでいてもよい。 Switching the normal mode to the irregular mode lengthens the communication cycle, increases the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to one communication cycle, and transmits both the first attribute transmission data and the second attribute transmission data. It may include transmitting to the mobile station 400 in the first type communication slot 510 .
 例えば通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、サイクリック通信の通信サイクルを長くして1の通信サイクルに対応する時分割複信パターンの数を増やし、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データの両方が同期スロット521により移動局400に送信されるように無線通信部213を制御する。通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、制御サイクルを長くして制御サイクルに対応する時分割複信パターンの数を増やし、同期スロット521により送信される通信データを増やして非同期スロット522により送信される通信データを減らしてもよい。通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により非同期通信サイクルの非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、サイクリック通信の通信サイクルを長くし、各通信サイクルが同期通信サイクルとなるようにサイクリック通信を制御してもよい。 For example, when the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 112 lengthens the communication cycle of the cyclic communication and increases the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to one communication cycle. is increased, and the radio communication unit 213 is controlled so that both the first attribute transmission data and the second attribute transmission data are transmitted to the mobile station 400 in the synchronization slot 521 . When the communication monitor 131 detects that the communication quality is degraded, the communication control unit 112 lengthens the control cycle to increase the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to the control cycle. Less communication data may be sent by asynchronous slots 522 with more data. When the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 of the asynchronous communication cycle, the communication control unit 112 lengthens the communication cycle of the cyclic communication so that each communication cycle becomes a synchronous communication cycle. Cyclic communication may be controlled.
 通常モードをイレギュラーモードに切り替えることは、送信データの圧縮により、第1種の通信スロット510により送信される送信データを増やすことを含んでいてもよい。 Switching the normal mode to the irregular mode may include increasing the transmission data transmitted by the first type communication slot 510 by compressing the transmission data.
 例えば通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データを圧縮し、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データの両方が同期スロット521により送信されるように無線通信部213を制御する。 For example, when the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 112 compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute, and compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute. The wireless communication unit 213 is controlled so that both of the transmission data of the second attribute are transmitted by the synchronization slot 521. FIG.
 通常モードをイレギュラーモードに切り替えることは、第2種の通信スロット510により第2属性の送信データを送信することを少なくとも部分的に中断することを含んでいてもよい。例えば通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、非同期スロット522により第2属性の送信データを送信することが少なくとも部分的に中断されるように無線通信部213を制御する。 Switching the normal mode to the irregular mode may include at least partially suspending transmission of the second attribute transmission data through the second type communication slot 510 . For example, when the communication monitor 131 detects a deterioration in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 112 causes the transmission of the second attribute transmission data in the asynchronous slot 522 to be at least partially interrupted. It controls the wireless communication unit 213 .
 通常モードをイレギュラーモードに切り替えることは、無線通信の信号強度を上昇させることを含んでいてもよい。例えば通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、無線通信部213に無線通信の信号強度の上昇を要求する。 Switching from normal mode to irregular mode may include increasing the signal strength of wireless communication. For example, when the communication monitor 131 detects deterioration in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 112 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to increase the signal strength of wireless communication.
 通信システム1は、低下していた通信品質の回復を検出した場合に、イレギュラーモードを通常モードに戻すように構成されていてもよい。イレギュラーモードにおいて、非同期スロット522による第2属性の送信データの送信が行われない場合、第2属性の送信データの送信に基づいて、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価することはできない。そこで、通信システム1は、イレギュラーモードにおいて、非同期スロット522による第2属性の送信データの送信が行われない場合、非同期スロット522による第3属性の送信データの通信品質を評価するように構成されていてもよい。 The communication system 1 may be configured to return the irregular mode to the normal mode when recovery of the communication quality that has been degraded is detected. In the irregular mode, if the transmission data of the second attribute is not transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 cannot be evaluated based on the transmission of the transmission data of the second attribute. Therefore, the communication system 1 is configured to evaluate the communication quality of the transmission data of the third attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 is not transmitted in the irregular mode. may be
 例えば通信制御部112は、第3属性の送信データが非同期スロット522により移動局400に送信されるように無線通信部213を制御する。通信制御部112は、イレギュラーモードにおいて、非同期スロット522による第2属性の送信データの送信が行われない場合に、第3属性の送信データが非同期スロット522により移動局400に送信されるように無線通信部213を制御してもよい。第3属性の送信データは、通信品質の評価以外には用いられないダミーデータであってもよい。 For example, the communication control unit 112 controls the wireless communication unit 213 so that the transmission data of the third attribute is transmitted to the mobile station 400 using the asynchronous slot 522. In the irregular mode, the communication control unit 112 controls the transmission data of the third attribute to be transmitted to the mobile station 400 by the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute is not transmitted by the asynchronous slot 522. The wireless communication unit 213 may be controlled. The transmission data of the third attribute may be dummy data that is used only for communication quality evaluation.
 通信モニタ131は、非同期スロット522による第2属性の送信データの送信が行われない場合に、非同期スロット522による第3属性の送信データの通信品質を評価してもよい。通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により、低下していた通信品質の回復が検出された場合に、イレギュラーモードを通常モードに戻すように無線通信部213を制御してもよい。 The communication monitor 131 may evaluate the communication quality of the transmission data of the third attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 is not transmitted. The communication control unit 112 may control the wireless communication unit 213 to return the irregular mode to the normal mode when the communication monitor 131 detects that the communication quality has recovered.
 通信システム1は、通信モニタ131により第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、第2種の通信スロット510により送信された第2属性の送信データを、次の時分割複信パターンの第2種の通信スロット510により再度送信するように構成されていてもよい。例えば通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、非同期スロット522により送信された第2属性の送信データが、次の時分割複信パターンの非同期スロット522により再度送信されるように無線通信部213を制御する。例えば通信制御部112は、通信モニタ131により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、非同期スロット522により送信された第2属性の送信データを、無線通信部213による送信対象として送信バッファ211に残す。送信バッファ211に残された送信データは、次の時分割複信パターンの非同期スロット522により、無線通信部213から移動局400に再度送信される。 When the communication monitor 131 detects the deterioration of the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510, the communication system 1 replaces the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted by the second type communication slot 510 at the next time. It may be configured to retransmit in the second type communication slot 510 of the division duplex pattern. For example, when the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 112 sets the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 to the asynchronous data of the next time division duplex pattern. The wireless communication unit 213 is controlled so as to retransmit using the slot 522 . For example, when the communication monitor 131 detects deterioration in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 112 transmits the second attribute transmission data transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 as a transmission target by the wireless communication unit 213. Leave in buffer 211 . The transmission data left in the transmission buffer 211 is transmitted again from the wireless communication section 213 to the mobile station 400 at the asynchronous slot 522 of the next time division duplex pattern.
 通信システム1は、第1種の通信スロット510における通信品質を評価することを更に実行するように構成されていてもよい。例えば通信システム1は、同期スロット521における通信品質を評価することを更に実行するように構成されていてもよい。通信システム1は、第1種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ131により検出された場合に、アプリケーション3を停止させ、無線通信をリセットするように構成されていてもよい。 The communication system 1 may be configured to further evaluate the communication quality in the communication slot 510 of the first type. For example, the communication system 1 may be configured to further perform communication quality evaluation in the synchronization slot 521 . The communication system 1 may be configured to stop the application 3 and reset the wireless communication when the communication monitor 131 detects deterioration of communication quality in the first type communication slot 510 .
 例えば通信モニタ131は、同期スロット521における通信品質を更に評価する。通信品質の評価手法については、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価する手法と同じである。通信制御部112は、同期スロット521における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ131により検出された場合に、アプリケーション3を停止させる。例えば通信制御部112は、同期スロット521における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ131により検出された場合に、複数のコントローラ111による複数のマシン20の制御を中断させ、複数のマシン20の動作を停止させる。 For example, the communication monitor 131 further evaluates the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521. The communication quality evaluation method is the same as the communication quality evaluation method for the asynchronous slot 522 . The communication control unit 112 suspends the application 3 when the communication monitor 131 detects deterioration of communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 . For example, when the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the synchronization slot 521, the communication control unit 112 interrupts the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111 and stops the operation of the machines 20. .
 コントロールサーバ100は、リセット部132を更に備える。リセット部132は、通信制御部112がアプリケーション3を停止させた後に、無線通信部213に無線通信のリセットを要求する。無線通信部213は、リセット部132からの要求に応じて、移動局400との間の無線通信をリセットする。例えば無線通信部213は、移動局400との間のペアリング(後述)を再度実行する。 The control server 100 further comprises a reset unit 132. The reset unit 132 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to reset wireless communication after the communication control unit 112 stops the application 3 . Radio communication section 213 resets radio communication with mobile station 400 in response to a request from reset section 132 . For example, the wireless communication unit 213 performs pairing (described later) with the mobile station 400 again.
〔ローカルコントローラ及び移動局の構成〕
 図9は、ローカルコントローラ300及び移動局400の構成を例示するブロック図である。図9に示すように、ローカルコントローラ300は、機能ブロックとして、マシン駆動部311と、通信制御部312とを有する。
[Configuration of local controller and mobile station]
FIG. 9 is a block diagram illustrating the configuration of local controller 300 and mobile station 400. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 9, the local controller 300 has a machine drive section 311 and a communication control section 312 as functional blocks.
 マシン駆動部311は、コントローラ111からマシン駆動部311への1以上の通信と、マシン駆動部311からコントローラ111への1以上の通信とを含む駆動サイクルを繰り返して、マシン本体30を駆動する。例えばマシン駆動部311は、コントローラ111からの上記指令データの受信と、指令データに応じた駆動電力のマシン本体30への出力と、駆動電力に応じたマシン本体30の動作を表す応答データの取得と、コントローラ111への指令データの送信と、を含む駆動サイクルを繰り返す。例えばマシン駆動部311は、上記目標出力データに応じた目標出力をマシン本体30に発生させるための駆動電力をマシン本体30に出力する。駆動電力に応じたマシン本体30の動作は、上記指令データに応じてマシン20が実現した動作の一例である。 The machine drive unit 311 drives the machine body 30 by repeating drive cycles including one or more communications from the controller 111 to the machine drive unit 311 and one or more communications from the machine drive unit 311 to the controller 111 . For example, the machine drive unit 311 receives the command data from the controller 111, outputs drive power to the machine body 30 according to the command data, and acquires response data representing the operation of the machine body 30 according to the drive power. and transmission of command data to the controller 111 are repeated. For example, the machine drive unit 311 outputs drive power to the machine body 30 for causing the machine body 30 to generate a target output according to the target output data. The operation of the machine body 30 in accordance with the drive power is an example of the operation realized by the machine 20 in accordance with the command data.
 駆動サイクルは、上記制御サイクルに同期しており、上記通信サイクルを含む。マシン駆動部311は、指令データ等の受信データの受信と、応答データ等の送信データの送信とを通信制御部312に実行させる。例えばマシン駆動部311は、受信データを通信制御部312に受信させ、通信制御部312が受信した受信データを取得する。また、マシン駆動部311は、送信データを通信制御部312に出力し、送信データの送信を通信制御部312に実行させる。 The drive cycle is synchronized with the control cycle and includes the communication cycle. The machine drive unit 311 causes the communication control unit 312 to receive reception data such as command data and transmit transmission data such as response data. For example, the machine drive unit 311 causes the communication control unit 312 to receive the received data, and acquires the received data received by the communication control unit 312 . Further, the machine drive unit 311 outputs transmission data to the communication control unit 312 and causes the communication control unit 312 to transmit the transmission data.
 通信制御部312は、受信データの受信と、送信データの送信とを、移動局400を介して実行する。移動局400は、送信バッファ411と、受信バッファ412と、無線通信部413と、クロック414とを有する。無線通信部413は、上記時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、基地局200(相手無線通信部)との間で無線通信を行う。例えば無線通信部413は、送信バッファ411から送信データを読み出して、時分割複信パターンのアップリンクスロットによって送信データを基地局200に送信する。また、無線通信部413は、時分割複信パターンのダウンリンクスロットによって受信データを基地局200から受信し、受信データを受信バッファ412に格納する。 The communication control unit 312 receives received data and transmits transmitted data via the mobile station 400 . Mobile station 400 has transmission buffer 411 , reception buffer 412 , radio communication section 413 , and clock 414 . The radio communication unit 413 repeats the time division duplex pattern to perform radio communication with the base station 200 (counterpart radio communication unit). For example, the wireless communication unit 413 reads out transmission data from the transmission buffer 411 and transmits the transmission data to the base station 200 using the uplink slots of the time division duplex pattern. Also, the wireless communication unit 413 receives reception data from the base station 200 using the downlink slot of the time division duplex pattern, and stores the reception data in the reception buffer 412 .
 通信制御部312は、マシン駆動部311から取得した送信データを、送信バッファ411に格納する。上述したように、送信バッファ411に格納された送信データは無線通信部413により読み出される。このため、送信バッファ411に送信データを格納することは、無線通信部413に送信データを引き渡すことの一例である。送信バッファ411に格納されたデータは、移動局400及び基地局200を介してコントローラ111に送信される。 The communication control unit 312 stores the transmission data acquired from the machine driving unit 311 in the transmission buffer 411. As described above, the transmission data stored in transmission buffer 411 is read by wireless communication section 413 . Therefore, storing the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 is an example of handing over the transmission data to the wireless communication unit 413 . The data stored in transmission buffer 411 is transmitted to controller 111 via mobile station 400 and base station 200 .
 通信制御部312は、無線通信部413が基地局200から受信した受信データを受信バッファ412から読み出す。受信バッファ412から受信データを読み出すことは、無線通信部413から受信データを取得することの一例である。受信バッファ412から受信データを読み出すことによって、基地局200及び移動局400を介してコントローラ111から受信データが受信される。 The communication control unit 312 reads the reception data received by the wireless communication unit 413 from the base station 200 from the reception buffer 412 . Reading received data from the reception buffer 412 is an example of obtaining received data from the wireless communication unit 413 . The reception data is received from the controller 111 via the base station 200 and the mobile station 400 by reading the reception data from the reception buffer 412 .
 クロック414は、時分割複信パターンの繰り返しに必要な時刻を繰り返し生成する。以下、クロック414が生成する時刻を「移動局時刻」という。無線通信部413は、移動局時刻に基づいて時分割複信パターンを繰り返す。 A clock 414 repeatedly generates the time necessary for repeating the time division duplex pattern. Hereinafter, the time generated by the clock 414 will be referred to as "mobile station time". Radio communication section 413 repeats the time division duplex pattern based on the mobile station time.
 例えば無線通信部413は、一定の繰り返しサイクルの経過を通知する通信クロック信号が生成される度に時分割複信パターンを実行する。この場合、通信クロック信号の生成から、次の通信クロック信号の生成までの間に行われる通信が、1の時分割複信パターンである。 For example, the wireless communication unit 413 executes a time-division duplex pattern each time a communication clock signal that notifies the passage of a certain repetition cycle is generated. In this case, the communication performed between the generation of the communication clock signal and the generation of the next communication clock signal is one time division duplex pattern.
 基地局200の無線通信部213は、無線通信部413との間で無線通信を開始する際に、ペアリングを行う。ペアリングは、時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングの同期を含む。無線通信部213は、ペアリングにより同期された開始タイミングから、基地局時刻に基づいて時分割複信パターンを繰り返す。無線通信部413は、ペアリングにより同期された開始タイミングから、移動局時刻に基づいて時分割複信パターンを繰り返す。 The wireless communication unit 213 of the base station 200 performs pairing when starting wireless communication with the wireless communication unit 413 . Pairing includes synchronizing the start timing of the time division duplex pattern. Radio communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern based on the base station time from the start timing synchronized by pairing. Radio communication section 413 repeats the time division duplex pattern based on the mobile station time from the start timing synchronized by pairing.
 ペアリングは、通信パターン設定部114により設定された時分割複信パターンの通知を含む。無線通信部213は、ペアリングにおいて通知された時分割複信パターンを繰り返す。 Pairing includes notification of the time division duplex pattern set by the communication pattern setting unit 114. Wireless communication section 213 repeats the time division duplex pattern notified in pairing.
 通信制御部112と同様に、通信制御部312は、マシン駆動部311が生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロット510により無線通信部413から基地局200に送信させ、マシン駆動部311が生成した送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロット510により無線通信部413から基地局200に送信させてもよい。 As with the communication control unit 112, the communication control unit 312 transmits the transmission data from the wireless communication unit 413 to the base station through the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data generated by the machine driving unit 311 has the first attribute. 200 , and when the transmission data generated by the machine driving section 311 has the second attribute, the transmission data may be transmitted from the wireless communication section 413 to the base station 200 using the second type communication slot 510 .
 第1属性は第1優先度であり、第2属性は第1優先度よりも低い第2優先度であってもよい。通信制御部312は、第1優先度を有する送信データが同期スロット521により基地局200に送信され、第2優先度を有する送信データが非同期スロット522により基地局200に送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。 The first attribute may be the first priority, and the second attribute may be the second priority lower than the first priority. The communication control unit 312 performs radio communication so that transmission data having the first priority is transmitted to the base station 200 through the synchronous slot 521 and transmission data having the second priority is transmitted to the base station 200 through the asynchronous slot 522. 413 may be controlled.
 第1属性は、「上記制御データであること」であってもよく、通信制御部312は、送信データが制御データである場合に、送信データが同期スロット521で送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。第2属性は、「上記制御データとは異なる所定種別のデータであること」であってもよく、通信制御部312は、送信データが上記所定種別のデータである場合に、送信データが非同期スロット522で送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。 The first attribute may be “the above control data”, and the communication control unit 312 controls the wireless communication unit so that the transmission data is transmitted in the synchronization slot 521 when the transmission data is the control data. 413 may be controlled. The second attribute may be "data of a predetermined type different from the control data". The wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled to transmit by 522.
 第1属性は、「マシン20の異常を通知する異常通知データであること」であってもよく、通信制御部312は、送信データが上記異常通知データである場合に、送信データが同期スロット521で送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。第2属性は、「上記異常通知データに比較して緊急性の低い所定種別の通知データであること」であってもよく、この場合、通信制御部312は、送信データが上記所定種別の通知データである場合に、送信データが非同期スロット522で送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。 The first attribute may be "abnormality notification data for notifying an abnormality of the machine 20". You may control the wireless communication part 413 so that it may transmit by . The second attribute may be "notification data of a predetermined type with less urgency than the abnormality notification data". If it is data, the wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled so that the transmission data is transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 .
 以上に例示したように、通信制御部312は、送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを、送信データの属性に基づいて制御する。このような制御を行うために、通信制御部312は、送信データの属性を表す属性情報を、送信データと共にマシン駆動部311から取得する。通信制御部312は、取得した属性情報に基づいて、送信データの属性を表すタグを送信データに付し、タグが付された送信データを送信バッファ411に格納する。無線通信部413は、送信データに付されたタグに基づいて、送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを制御する。 As exemplified above, the communication control unit 312 controls which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the attributes of the transmission data. In order to perform such control, the communication control unit 312 acquires attribute information representing attributes of transmission data from the machine driving unit 311 together with the transmission data. Based on the acquired attribute information, the communication control unit 312 attaches a tag representing the attribute of the transmission data to the transmission data, and stores the tagged transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 . The wireless communication unit 413 controls which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the tag attached to the transmission data.
 例えば通信制御部312は、送信データが第1属性を有する場合に第1タグを付して送信データを送信バッファ411に格納し、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に第2タグを付して送信データを送信バッファ411に格納する。無線通信部413は、送信データに第1タグが付されている場合に第1種の通信スロット510により送信データを基地局200に送信し、送信データに第2タグが付されている場合に第2種の通信スロット510により送信データを基地局200に送信する。 For example, the communication control unit 312 attaches a first tag to the transmission data when it has a first attribute and stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411, and attaches a second tag to the transmission data when it has a second attribute. and stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 . The wireless communication unit 413 transmits the transmission data to the base station 200 using the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is tagged with the first tag, and when the transmission data is tagged with the second tag. Transmission data is transmitted to the base station 200 using the second type communication slot 510 .
 送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを、送信データの属性に基づいて制御する手法は、送信データにタグを付与する手法に限られない。例えば通信制御部312は、送信データの属性に基づいて、送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを決定し、決定済みの通信スロット510にて送信データが送信されるように、送信データを送信バッファ411に格納するタイミングを制御してもよい。 The method of controlling which communication slot 510 is used to transmit the transmission data based on the attributes of the transmission data is not limited to the method of tagging the transmission data. For example, the communication control unit 312 determines in which communication slot 510 the transmission data is to be transmitted based on the attributes of the transmission data, and controls the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the determined communication slot 510 . may be controlled in the timing of storing in the transmission buffer 411 .
 この場合、移動局400は、タイミング通知部421を更に有する。タイミング通知部421は、時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングを通信制御部312に通知する。通信制御部312は、時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングに基づいて、各通信スロット510の実行タイミングを認識し、上記決定済みの通信スロット510にて送信データが送信されるように、送信データを送信バッファ411に格納するタイミングを制御する。 In this case, the mobile station 400 further has a timing notification section 421. The timing notification unit 421 notifies the communication control unit 312 of the start timing of the time division duplex pattern. The communication control unit 312 recognizes the execution timing of each communication slot 510 based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern, and adjusts the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the determined communication slot 510. It controls the timing of storing in the transmission buffer 411 .
 通信制御部312は、通信制御部112と同様に、サイクリック通信の連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御してもよい。例えば通信制御部312は、通信制御部112と協働して上記サイクリック通信を行う。通信制御部112との協働により、通信制御部312が実現するサイクリック通信の具体例については、通信制御部112の説明において詳述したとおりである。 As with the communication control unit 112, the communication control unit 312 is configured so that at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of cyclic communication is performed within one time division duplex pattern of wireless communication. Cyclic communication may be controlled. For example, the communication control unit 312 cooperates with the communication control unit 112 to perform the cyclic communication. A specific example of cyclic communication realized by the communication control unit 312 in cooperation with the communication control unit 112 is as described in detail in the explanation of the communication control unit 112 .
 コントロールサーバ100の通信制御部112は、通信制御部312との間でサイクリック通信を開始する際に、ペアリングを行う。ペアリングは、時分割複信パターンと通信サイクルとの関係の通知を含む。通信制御部312は、通知された時分割複信パターンと通信サイクルとの関係を維持するように、通信制御部112と協働して通信サイクルを繰り返す。 The communication control unit 112 of the control server 100 performs pairing when starting cyclic communication with the communication control unit 312 . Pairing involves signaling the relationship between the time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle. The communication control unit 312 repeats the communication cycle in cooperation with the communication control unit 112 so as to maintain the relationship between the notified time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle.
 例えば、繰り返しサイクルと通信サイクルとが等しい場合、ペアリングは、上記サイクル開始スロットの通知を含む。通信制御部312は、タイミング通知部421から取得した時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングに基づいて、サイクル開始スロットの実行タイミングを認識する。通信制御部312は、サイクル開始スロットの実行タイミングに基づいて、上記1の通信サイクルが上記サイクル開始スロットにおいて開始されるように、繰り返しサイクルと等しい各通信サイクルにおいて、送信データを送信バッファ411に格納するタイミングを制御する。 For example, if the repetition cycle and the communication cycle are equal, the pairing includes notification of the cycle start slot. The communication control unit 312 recognizes the execution timing of the cycle start slot based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern acquired from the timing notification unit 421 . Based on the execution timing of the cycle start slot, the communication control unit 312 stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 in each communication cycle equal to the repetition cycle so that the one communication cycle is started at the cycle start slot. control when to
 例えば、通信サイクルが繰り返しサイクルの上記逓倍数分の一である場合、ペアリングは、サイクル開始スロット及び逓倍数の通知を含む。通信制御部312は、タイミング通知部421から取得した時分割複信パターンの開始タイミングに基づいて、サイクル開始スロットの実行タイミングを認識する。通信制御部312は、サイクル開始スロットの実行タイミングに基づいて、上記1の通信サイクルが上記サイクル開始スロットにおいて開始されるように、繰り返しサイクルの逓倍数分の一である各通信サイクルにおいて、送信データを送信バッファ411に格納するタイミングを制御する。 For example, if the communication cycle is 1/the above multiple number of repetition cycles, the pairing includes notification of the cycle start slot and the multiple number. The communication control unit 312 recognizes the execution timing of the cycle start slot based on the start timing of the time division duplex pattern acquired from the timing notification unit 421 . Based on the execution timing of the cycle start slot, the communication control unit 312 controls the transmission data in each communication cycle, which is 1/multiple of the repetition cycle, so that the one communication cycle is started in the cycle start slot. is stored in the transmission buffer 411.
 ローカルコントローラ300は、コントロールサーバ100の通信モニタ131と同様に、通信モニタ331を更に有してもよい。通信モニタ331は、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価する。 The local controller 300 may further have a communication monitor 331 similar to the communication monitor 131 of the control server 100 . Communication monitor 331 evaluates communication quality in asynchronous slot 522 .
 逓倍数の通信サイクルが、同期通信サイクルと、非同期通信サイクルとを含む場合、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価することは、非同期通信サイクルにおける通信品質を評価することの一例である。 When the multiplication number communication cycle includes a synchronous communication cycle and an asynchronous communication cycle, evaluating communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 is an example of evaluating communication quality in the asynchronous communication cycle.
 例えば通信モニタ331は、非同期スロット522における通信のパケットのロス率に基づいて、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価してもよい。例えば通信モニタ331は、パケットロス率が所定の低下検出閾値を超えているか否かを評価し、パケットロス率が低下検出閾値を超えた場合に、通信品質の低下を検出してもよい。 For example, the communication monitor 331 may evaluate the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 based on the communication packet loss rate in the asynchronous slot 522 . For example, the communication monitor 331 may evaluate whether the packet loss rate exceeds a predetermined degradation detection threshold, and detect degradation of communication quality when the packet loss rate exceeds the degradation detection threshold.
 通信モニタ331は、非同期スロット522における通信のジッタの大きさに基づいて、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価してもよい。例えば通信モニタ331は、ジッタの大きさが所定の低下検出閾値を超えているか否かを評価し、ジッタの大きさが低下検出閾値を超えた場合に、通信品質の低下を検出してもよい。 The communication monitor 331 may evaluate communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 based on the magnitude of communication jitter in the asynchronous slot 522 . For example, the communication monitor 331 may evaluate whether or not the magnitude of jitter exceeds a predetermined deterioration detection threshold, and detect deterioration of communication quality when the magnitude of jitter exceeds the deterioration detection threshold. .
 通信制御部312は、通信モニタ331により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、通常モードからイレギュラーモードへの切り替え要求を通信制御部112に送信してもよい。通信制御部112は、上記切り替え要求を受信した場合に、通信モニタ131により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合と同様に、通常モードからイレギュラーモードへの切り替えを実行してもよい。 The communication control unit 312 may transmit a request for switching from the normal mode to the irregular mode to the communication control unit 112 when the communication monitor 331 detects that the communication quality has deteriorated in the asynchronous slot 522 . When receiving the switching request, the communication control unit 112 may switch from the normal mode to the irregular mode in the same manner as when the communication monitor 131 detects the deterioration of the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522. good.
 通信制御部112が、サイクリック通信の通信サイクルを長くして1の通信サイクルに対応する時分割複信パターンの数を増やす場合に、通信制御部312は、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データの両方が同期スロット521により基地局200に送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。通信制御部312は、同期スロット521により送信される通信データを増やして非同期スロット522により送信される通信データを減らしてもよい。 When the communication control unit 112 increases the number of time division duplex patterns corresponding to one communication cycle by lengthening the communication cycle of cyclic communication, the communication control unit 312 controls the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute. The wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled so that both attribute transmission data are transmitted to the base station 200 in the synchronization slot 521 . The communication control section 312 may increase the communication data transmitted by the synchronous slot 521 and reduce the communication data transmitted by the asynchronous slot 522 .
 通信制御部312は、通信モニタ331により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データを圧縮し、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データの両方が同期スロット521により送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。通信制御部312は、通信モニタ331により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、非同期スロット522により第2属性の送信データを送信することが少なくとも部分的に中断されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。通信制御部312は、通信モニタ331により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、無線通信部413に無線通信の信号強度の上昇を要求してもよい。 When the communication monitor 331 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 312 compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute, and compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute. The wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled so that both transmission data of two attributes are transmitted using the synchronization slot 521 . When the communication monitor 331 detects a deterioration of the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 312 controls the wireless communication so that the transmission of the second attribute transmission data in the asynchronous slot 522 is at least partially interrupted. The communication unit 413 may be controlled. The communication control unit 312 may request the wireless communication unit 413 to increase the signal strength of the wireless communication when the communication monitor 331 detects the deterioration of the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 .
 通信制御部312は、第3属性の送信データが非同期スロット522により基地局200に送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。通信制御部312は、イレギュラーモードにおいて、非同期スロット522による第2属性の送信データの送信が行われない場合に、第3属性の送信データが非同期スロット522により基地局200に送信されるように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。第3属性の送信データは、通信品質の評価以外には用いられないダミーデータであってもよい。 The communication control unit 312 may control the wireless communication unit 413 so that the transmission data of the third attribute is transmitted to the base station 200 through the asynchronous slot 522. In the irregular mode, the communication control unit 312 controls the transmission data of the third attribute to be transmitted to the base station 200 by the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute is not transmitted by the asynchronous slot 522. The wireless communication unit 413 may be controlled. The transmission data of the third attribute may be dummy data that is used only for communication quality evaluation.
 通信モニタ331は、非同期スロット522による第2属性の送信データの送信が行われない場合に、非同期スロット522による第3属性の送信データの通信品質を評価してもよい。通信制御部312は、通信モニタ331により、低下していた通信品質の回復が検出された場合に、イレギュラーモードから通常モードへの回復要求を通信制御部112に送信してもよい。通信制御部112は、上記回復要求を受信した場合に、通信モニタ131により通信品質の回復が検出された場合と同様に、通常モードからイレギュラーモードへの切り替えを実行してもよい。 The communication monitor 331 may evaluate the communication quality of the transmission data of the third attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 when the transmission data of the second attribute through the asynchronous slot 522 is not transmitted. The communication control unit 312 may transmit a recovery request from the irregular mode to the normal mode to the communication control unit 112 when the communication monitor 331 detects that the communication quality has been restored. When the recovery request is received, the communication control unit 112 may switch from the normal mode to the irregular mode in the same manner as when the communication monitor 131 detects recovery of communication quality.
 通信制御部312は、通信モニタ331により、低下していた通信品質の回復が検出された場合に、イレギュラーモードを通常モードに戻すように無線通信部413を制御してもよい。 The communication control unit 312 may control the wireless communication unit 413 to return the irregular mode to the normal mode when the communication monitor 331 detects recovery of the degraded communication quality.
 通信システム1は、通信モニタ331により第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、第2種の通信スロット510により送信された第2属性の送信データを、次の時分割複信パターンの第2種の通信スロット510により再度送信するように構成されていてもよい。例えば通信制御部312は、通信モニタ331により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、非同期スロット522により送信された第2属性の送信データが、次の時分割複信パターンの非同期スロット522により再度送信されるように無線通信部413を制御する。例えば通信制御部312は、通信モニタ331により非同期スロット522における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、非同期スロット522により送信された第2属性の送信データを、無線通信部413による送信対象として送信バッファ411に残す。送信バッファ411に残された送信データは、次の時分割複信パターンの非同期スロット522により、無線通信部413から移動局400に再度送信される。 When the communication monitor 331 detects the deterioration of the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510, the communication system 1 changes the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted by the second type communication slot 510 at the next time. It may be configured to retransmit in the second type communication slot 510 of the division duplex pattern. For example, when the communication monitor 331 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 312 sets the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 to the asynchronous data of the next time division duplex pattern. The wireless communication unit 413 is controlled so as to retransmit using the slot 522 . For example, when the communication monitor 331 detects a decrease in communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522, the communication control unit 312 transmits the second attribute transmission data transmitted in the asynchronous slot 522 as a transmission target by the wireless communication unit 413. Leave in buffer 411 . The transmission data left in the transmission buffer 411 is transmitted again from the radio communication section 413 to the mobile station 400 by the asynchronous slot 522 of the next time division duplex pattern.
 通信モニタ331は、同期スロット521における通信品質を更に評価してもよい。通信品質の評価手法については、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価する手法と同じである。通信制御部312は、同期スロット521における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ331により検出された場合に、アプリケーション3を停止させる。例えば通信制御部312は、同期スロット521における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ331により検出された場合に、複数のマシン20の停止要求を通信制御部112に送信する。停止要求を受信した通信制御部112は、複数のコントローラ111による複数のマシン20の制御を中断させ、複数のマシン20を停止させる。 The communication monitor 331 may further evaluate the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521. The communication quality evaluation method is the same as the communication quality evaluation method for the asynchronous slot 522 . The communication control unit 312 suspends the application 3 when the communication monitor 331 detects deterioration of communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 . For example, the communication control unit 312 transmits a request to stop the plurality of machines 20 to the communication control unit 112 when the communication monitor 331 detects deterioration of communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 . The communication control unit 112 that has received the stop request interrupts the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111 to stop the machines 20 .
 ローカルコントローラ300は、リセット部332を更に備える。リセット部332は、通信制御部312がアプリケーション3を停止させた後に、無線通信部413に無線通信のリセットを要求する。無線通信部413は、リセット部332からの要求に応じて、基地局200との間の無線通信をリセットする。例えば無線通信部413は、上記ペアリングの再度実行を無線通信部213に要求する。 The local controller 300 further comprises a reset section 332. The reset unit 332 requests the wireless communication unit 413 to reset wireless communication after the communication control unit 312 stops the application 3 . Radio communication section 413 resets radio communication with base station 200 in response to a request from reset section 332 . For example, the wireless communication unit 413 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to perform the pairing again.
〔ハードウェア構成〕
 図10は、コントロールサーバ100及び基地局200のハードウェア構成を例示するブロック図である。図10に示すように、コントロールサーバ100は、回路190を有する。回路190は、上記サイクリック通信を制御する通信制御回路を含む。回路190は、プロセッサ191と、メモリ192と、ストレージ193と、通信ポート194とを有する。
[Hardware configuration]
FIG. 10 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware configuration of the control server 100 and base station 200. As shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 10, the control server 100 has circuitry 190 . Circuit 190 includes a communication control circuit that controls the cyclic communication described above. Circuit 190 has processor 191 , memory 192 , storage 193 and communication port 194 .
 ストレージ193は、不揮発性の記憶媒体である。ストレージ193の具体例としては、ハードディスク、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられる。ストレージ193は、光ディスクなどの可搬型の記憶媒体であってもよい。ストレージ193は、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションを示すコンフィギュレーション情報を取得することと、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに応じて、時分割複信のダウンリンクスロットと、前記時分割複信のアップリンクスロットとの配列を定める時分割複信パターンを設定することと、設定済みの時分割複信パターンを繰り返して無線通信を行うことと、をコントロールサーバ100に実行させるためのプログラムを記憶していてもよい。 The storage 193 is a non-volatile storage medium. Specific examples of the storage 193 include a hard disk, flash memory, and the like. The storage 193 may be a portable storage medium such as an optical disc. The storage 193 acquires configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, and according to the configuration of the device system 10, a time division duplex downlink slot and a time division duplex uplink slot. setting a time division duplex pattern that defines the arrangement of and repeating the set time division duplex pattern to perform wireless communication. good.
 ストレージ193は、送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロットにより基地局200(無線通信部)から移動局400(相手無線通信部)に送信させることと、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロットにより基地局200(無線通信部)から移動局400(相手無線通信部)に送信させることと、をコントロールサーバ100に実行させるためのプログラムを記憶していてもよい。 When the transmission data has the first attribute, the storage 193 causes the base station 200 (wireless communication section) to transmit the transmission data to the mobile station 400 (counterpart wireless communication section) using the first type communication slot; causing the control server 100 to transmit the transmission data from the base station 200 (wireless communication unit) to the mobile station 400 (counterpart wireless communication unit) using the second type communication slot when the data has the second attribute. You may store a program to make it work.
 ストレージ193は、無線通信システム2を利用して、サイクリック通信を行うことと、サイクリック通信の連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御することと、をコントロールサーバ100に実行させるプログラムを記憶していてもよい。 The storage 193 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is a time division duplex pattern of 1 for wireless communication. A program may be stored that causes the control server 100 to control cyclic communication, as is done within the control server 100 .
 例えばストレージ193は、上述した各機能ブロックをコントロールサーバ100に構成させるためのプログラムを記憶している。 For example, the storage 193 stores a program for causing the control server 100 to configure each functional block described above.
 メモリ192は、例えばランダムアクセスメモリ等の一時記憶媒体であり、ストレージ193からロードされたプログラムを一時的に記憶する。プロセッサ191は、1以上の演算素子により構成され、メモリ192にロードされたプログラムを実行することにより、コントロールサーバ100に上記各機能ブロックを構成させる。通信ポート194は、プロセッサ191からの要求に応じて、時刻サーバ101及び基地局200と通信する。 The memory 192 is a temporary storage medium such as random access memory, and temporarily stores programs loaded from the storage 193 . The processor 191 is composed of one or more arithmetic elements, and executes a program loaded in the memory 192 to cause the control server 100 to configure each of the above functional blocks. Communication port 194 communicates with time server 101 and base station 200 in response to requests from processor 191 .
 基地局200は、回路290を有する。回路290は、プロセッサ291と、メモリ292と、ストレージ293と、通信ポート294とを有する。 The base station 200 has a circuit 290. Circuit 290 has processor 291 , memory 292 , storage 293 and communication port 294 .
 ストレージ293は、不揮発性の記憶媒体である。ストレージ193の具体例としては、ハードディスク、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられる。ストレージ193は、光ディスクなどの可搬型の記憶媒体であってもよい。ストレージ293は、上述した各機能ブロックを基地局200に構成させるためのプログラムを記憶している。 The storage 293 is a non-volatile storage medium. Specific examples of the storage 193 include a hard disk, flash memory, and the like. The storage 193 may be a portable storage medium such as an optical disc. Storage 293 stores a program for configuring each functional block described above in base station 200 .
 メモリ292は、例えばランダムアクセスメモリ等の一時記憶媒体であり、ストレージ293からロードされたプログラムを一時的に記憶する。プロセッサ291は、1以上の演算素子により構成され、メモリ292にロードされたプログラムを実行することにより、基地局200に上記各機能ブロックを構成させる。通信ポート294は、プロセッサ291からの要求に応じて、通信ポート194と通信する。アンテナ295は、プロセッサ291からの要求に応じて、無線通信用の信号の送受信を行う。 The memory 292 is a temporary storage medium such as random access memory, and temporarily stores programs loaded from the storage 293 . The processor 291 is composed of one or more arithmetic elements, and executes a program loaded in the memory 292 to cause the base station 200 to configure each of the above functional blocks. Communication port 294 communicates with communication port 194 in response to requests from processor 291 . Antenna 295 transmits and receives a signal for wireless communication according to a request from processor 291 .
 図11は、ローカルコントローラ300及び移動局400のハードウェア構成を例示するブロック図である。図11に示すように、ローカルコントローラ300は、回路390を有する。回路390は、上記サイクリック通信を制御する通信制御回路を含む。回路390は、プロセッサ391と、メモリ392と、ストレージ393と、通信ポート394と、ドライブ回路395を有する。 11 is a block diagram illustrating the hardware configuration of the local controller 300 and the mobile station 400. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11, local controller 300 includes circuitry 390 . Circuitry 390 includes a communication control circuit that controls the cyclic communication described above. Circuitry 390 includes processor 391 , memory 392 , storage 393 , communication port 394 and drive circuitry 395 .
 ストレージ393は、不揮発性の記憶媒体である。ストレージ393の具体例としては、ハードディスク、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられる。ストレージ393は、光ディスクなどの可搬型の記憶媒体であってもよい。ストレージ393は、送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロットにより移動局400(無線通信部)から基地局200(相手無線通信部)に送信させることと、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロットにより移動局400(無線通信部)から基地局200(相手無線通信部)に送信させることと、をローカルコントローラ300に実行させるためのプログラムを記憶していてもよい。 The storage 393 is a non-volatile storage medium. Specific examples of the storage 393 include a hard disk, flash memory, and the like. The storage 393 may be a portable storage medium such as an optical disc. When the transmission data has the first attribute, the storage 393 causes the mobile station 400 (radio communication section) to transmit the transmission data to the base station 200 (opponent radio communication section) using the first type communication slot; causing the local controller 300 to transmit the transmission data from the mobile station 400 (wireless communication unit) to the base station 200 (counterpart wireless communication unit) using the second type communication slot when the data has the second attribute. You may store a program to make it work.
 ストレージ393は、無線通信システム2を利用して、サイクリック通信を行うことと、サイクリック通信の連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御することと、をローカルコントローラ300に実行させるプログラムを記憶していてもよい。 The storage 393 uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is a time division duplex pattern of 1 for wireless communication. A program may be stored that causes the local controller 300 to control cyclic communication, as occurs within.
 例えばストレージ393は、上述した各機能ブロックをローカルコントローラ300に構成させるためのプログラムを記憶している。 For example, the storage 393 stores a program for causing the local controller 300 to configure each functional block described above.
 メモリ392は、例えばランダムアクセスメモリ等の一時記憶媒体であり、ストレージ393からロードされたプログラムを一時的に記憶する。プロセッサ391は、1以上の演算素子により構成され、メモリ392にロードされたプログラムを実行することにより、ローカルコントローラ300に上記各機能ブロックを構成させる。通信ポート394は、プロセッサ391からの要求に応じて、移動局400と通信する。 The memory 392 is a temporary storage medium such as random access memory, and temporarily stores programs loaded from the storage 393 . The processor 391 is composed of one or more arithmetic elements, and executes a program loaded in the memory 392 to cause the local controller 300 to configure each of the above functional blocks. Communications port 394 communicates with mobile station 400 in response to requests from processor 391 .
 ドライブ回路395は、プロセッサ391からの要求に応じて、マシン本体30に駆動電力を出力し、マシン本体30から応答データを取得する。 The drive circuit 395 outputs drive power to the machine body 30 and acquires response data from the machine body 30 in response to a request from the processor 391 .
 移動局400は、回路490を有する。回路490は、プロセッサ491と、メモリ492と、ストレージ493と、通信ポート494とを有する。 The mobile station 400 has a circuit 490. Circuit 490 has processor 491 , memory 492 , storage 493 and communication port 494 .
 ストレージ493は、不揮発性の記憶媒体である。ストレージ493の具体例としては、ハードディスク、フラッシュメモリ等が挙げられる。ストレージ193は、光ディスクなどの可搬型の記憶媒体であってもよい。ストレージ493は、上述した各機能ブロックを移動局400に構成させるためのプログラムを記憶している。 The storage 493 is a non-volatile storage medium. Specific examples of the storage 493 include a hard disk, flash memory, and the like. The storage 193 may be a portable storage medium such as an optical disc. Storage 493 stores a program for configuring each functional block described above in mobile station 400 .
 メモリ492は、例えばランダムアクセスメモリ等の一時記憶媒体であり、ストレージ493からロードされたプログラムを一時的に記憶する。プロセッサ491は、1以上の演算素子により構成され、メモリ492にロードされたプログラムを実行することにより、移動局400に上記各機能ブロックを構成させる。通信ポート494は、プロセッサ491からの要求に応じて、通信ポート494と通信する。アンテナ495は、プロセッサ491からの要求に応じて、無線通信用の信号の送受信を行う。 The memory 492 is a temporary storage medium such as random access memory, and temporarily stores programs loaded from the storage 493 . The processor 491 is composed of one or more arithmetic elements, and executes a program loaded in the memory 492 to make the mobile station 400 configure each of the above functional blocks. Communication port 494 communicates with communication port 494 in response to requests from processor 491 . Antenna 495 transmits and receives a signal for wireless communication according to a request from processor 491 .
〔コントロールサーバ及び基地局による通信手順〕
 通信方法の一例として、コントロールサーバ100及び基地局200による通信手順を例示する。この手順は、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションを示すコンフィギュレーション情報を取得することと、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに応じて、時分割複信パターンを設定することと、設定済みの時分割複信パターンを繰り返して無線通信を行うことと、を含む。
[Communication procedure by control server and base station]
A communication procedure by the control server 100 and the base station 200 is illustrated as an example of the communication method. This procedure includes acquiring configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10, setting a time division duplex pattern according to the configuration of the device system 10, setting the already set time division duplex pattern and repeating wireless communication.
 また、この手順は、送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロット510により無線通信部213から移動局400に送信させることと、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロット510により無線通信部213から移動局400に送信させることと、を含む。 Also, this procedure is to transmit the transmission data from the radio communication unit 213 to the mobile station 400 using the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data has the first attribute, and to transmit the transmission data to the mobile station 400, and causing the wireless communication unit 213 to transmit the transmission data to the mobile station 400 using the second type communication slot 510 in the case where the transmission data is transmitted.
 また、この手順は、無線通信システム2を利用して、サイクリック通信を行うことと、サイクリック通信の連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御することと、を含む。 In addition, this procedure uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is one time-division multiplexing of wireless communication. and controlling cyclic communication to occur within a communication pattern.
 以下、この手順を、時分割複信パターン及びサイクル開始スロットの設定手順と、無線通信手順と、通信制御手順と、通信モードの変更手順とに分けて詳述する。(時分割複信パターン及びサイクル開始スロットの設定手順)図12に示すように、コントロールサーバ100は、まずステップS01,S02を順に実行する。ステップS01では、コンフィギュレーション情報取得部113が、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションを示すコンフィギュレーション情報を複数のコントローラ111から取得する。ステップS02では、通信パターン設定部114が、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションに応じて時分割複信パターンを設定する。 This procedure will be described in detail below by dividing it into a time division duplex pattern and cycle start slot setting procedure, a wireless communication procedure, a communication control procedure, and a communication mode changing procedure. (Procedure for Setting Time Division Duplex Pattern and Cycle Start Slot) As shown in FIG. 12, the control server 100 first executes steps S01 and S02 in order. In step S<b>01 , the configuration information acquisition unit 113 acquires configuration information indicating the configuration of the device system 10 from the multiple controllers 111 . In step S<b>02 , the communication pattern setting section 114 sets a time division duplex pattern according to the configuration of the device system 10 .
 次に、コントロールサーバ100は、ステップS03,S04,S05を実行する。ステップS03では、目標設定部122が、通信サイクルにおけるダウンリンクスロット511とアップリンクスロット512との目標配列を設定する。ステップS04では、通信制御部112が、各通信サイクルにおけるダウンリンクスロット511とアップリンクスロット512との配列を、目標配列に近似させるように、上記サイクル開始スロットを設定する。ステップS05では、コンフィギュレーション情報取得部113が、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションが変化するのを待機する。その後、コントロールサーバ100は処理をステップS01に戻す。以上の手順により、コントロールサーバ100は、デバイスシステム10のコンフィギュレーションが変化する度に、時分割複信パターンと、サイクルスロットとが設定される。 Next, the control server 100 executes steps S03, S04, and S05. In step S03, the target setting unit 122 sets the target arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in the communication cycle. In step S04, the communication control unit 112 sets the cycle start slot so that the arrangement of the downlink slots 511 and the uplink slots 512 in each communication cycle approximates the target arrangement. In step S05, the configuration information acquisition unit 113 waits for the configuration of the device system 10 to change. After that, the control server 100 returns the process to step S01. By the above procedure, the control server 100 sets the time division duplex pattern and the cycle slot each time the configuration of the device system 10 changes.
(無線通信手順)
 図13に示すように、基地局200は、ステップS11,S12を順に実行する。ステップS11では、無線通信部213が、無線通信部413とのペアリングを実行し、設定済みの時分割複信パターンによる無線通信を開始する。ステップS12では、無線通信部213が、現在の通信スロット510がダウンリンクスロット511であるか否かを確認する。
(Wireless communication procedure)
As shown in FIG. 13, the base station 200 sequentially executes steps S11 and S12. In step S11, the wireless communication unit 213 performs pairing with the wireless communication unit 413, and starts wireless communication according to the set time division duplex pattern. At step S<b>12 , the wireless communication unit 213 checks whether the current communication slot 510 is the downlink slot 511 .
 ステップS12において、現在の通信スロット510がダウンリンクスロット511であると判定した場合、基地局200はステップS13を実行する。ステップS13では、現在の通信スロット510が同期スロット521であるか否かを無線通信部213が確認する。 If it is determined in step S12 that the current communication slot 510 is the downlink slot 511, the base station 200 executes step S13. At step S13, the wireless communication unit 213 confirms whether the current communication slot 510 is the synchronization slot 521 or not.
 ステップS13において、現在の通信スロット510が同期スロット521であると判定した場合、基地局200はステップS14を実行する。ステップS14では、無線通信部213が、送信データに付されたタグに基づいて、同期スロット521用の送信データを送信バッファ211から読み出す。例えば無線通信部213は、上記第1タグが付された上記第1属性の送信データを送信バッファ211から読み出す。 If it is determined in step S13 that the current communication slot 510 is the synchronization slot 521, the base station 200 executes step S14. At step S14, the wireless communication unit 213 reads the transmission data for the synchronization slot 521 from the transmission buffer 211 based on the tag attached to the transmission data. For example, the wireless communication unit 213 reads the transmission data with the first attribute attached with the first tag from the transmission buffer 211 .
 ステップS13において、現在の通信スロットが非同期スロットであると判定した場合、基地局200はステップS15を実行する。ステップS15では、無線通信部213が、送信データに付されたタグに基づいて、非同期スロット522用の送信データを送信バッファ211から読み出す。例えば無線通信部213は、上記第2タグが付された上記第2属性の送信データを送信バッファ211から読み出す。 If it is determined in step S13 that the current communication slot is an asynchronous slot, the base station 200 executes step S15. In step S15, the wireless communication unit 213 reads the transmission data for the asynchronous slot 522 from the transmission buffer 211 based on the tag attached to the transmission data. For example, the wireless communication unit 213 reads the transmission data with the second attribute attached with the second tag from the transmission buffer 211 .
 次に、基地局200はステップS16,S17を実行する。ステップS16では、無線通信部213が、送信バッファ211から読み出した送信データを無線通信部413に送信する。ステップS17では、無線通信部213が、無線通信部413からのアクノリッジがあるかを確認する。 Next, the base station 200 executes steps S16 and S17. In step S<b>16 , wireless communication section 213 transmits the transmission data read from transmission buffer 211 to wireless communication section 413 . In step S<b>17 , wireless communication section 213 confirms whether there is an acknowledge from wireless communication section 413 .
 ステップS17において、アクノリッジがあると判定した場合、基地局200はステップS21,S22を実行する。ステップS21では、無線通信部213が、送信済みの送信データを送信バッファ211から削除する。ステップS22では、無線通信部213が、アクノリッジの受信タイミングに基づいて、ジッタの大きさを通信モニタ131に通知する。 If it is determined in step S17 that there is an acknowledgment, the base station 200 executes steps S21 and S22. In step S<b>21 , the wireless communication unit 213 deletes the transmitted transmission data from the transmission buffer 211 . In step S22, the wireless communication unit 213 notifies the communication monitor 131 of the jitter size based on the reception timing of the acknowledge.
 ステップS17において、アクノリッジがないと判定した場合、基地局200はステップS23を実行する。ステップS23では、無線通信部213が、パケットロスの発生を通信モニタ131に通知する。その後、基地局200は処理をステップS12に戻す。 If it is determined in step S17 that there is no acknowledge, the base station 200 executes step S23. In step S23, the wireless communication unit 213 notifies the communication monitor 131 of the occurrence of packet loss. After that, the base station 200 returns the process to step S12.
 ステップS12において、現在の通信スロット510がアップリンクスロット512であると判定した場合、図14に示すように、基地局200はステップS31,S32を実行する。ステップS31では、無線通信部213が、無線通信部413から受信データを受信する。ステップS32では、無線通信部213が、受信データを正常に受信できたか否かを確認する。 When it is determined in step S12 that the current communication slot 510 is the uplink slot 512, the base station 200 executes steps S31 and S32 as shown in FIG. In step S<b>31 , wireless communication section 213 receives reception data from wireless communication section 413 . In step S32, the wireless communication unit 213 confirms whether or not the received data has been successfully received.
 ステップS32において、受信データを正常に受信できたと判定した場合、基地局200はステップS33,S34を実行する。ステップS33では、無線通信部213が、無線通信部413にアクノリッジを送信する。ステップS34では、無線通信部213が、受信データを受信バッファ212に格納する。その後、基地局200は処理をステップS12に戻す。 If it is determined in step S32 that the reception data has been successfully received, the base station 200 executes steps S33 and S34. In step S<b>33 , wireless communication section 213 transmits an acknowledge to wireless communication section 413 . In step S<b>34 , wireless communication section 213 stores the received data in reception buffer 212 . After that, the base station 200 returns the process to step S12.
 ステップS32において、受信データを正常に受信できなかったと判定した場合、基地局200は、ステップS33,S34を実行することなく、処理をステップS12に戻す。基地局200は、以上の手順を繰り返すことで、通信スロットごとの通信を時分割で実行する。 If it is determined in step S32 that the received data could not be received normally, the base station 200 returns the process to step S12 without executing steps S33 and S34. By repeating the above procedure, the base station 200 performs communication for each communication slot in a time division manner.
(通信制御手順)
 図15に示すように、コントロールサーバ100は、まずステップS41,S42,S43,S44を実行する。ステップS41では、通信制御部112が、無線通信部213による無線通信の開始を待機する。ステップS42では、通信制御部112が、コントローラ111からの送信データの取得を待機する。ステップS43では、通信制御部112が、送信データの属性情報をコントローラ111から取得する。ステップS44では、通信制御部112が、属性情報に基づいて、送信データの属性を表すタグを送信データに付加する。
(Communication control procedure)
As shown in FIG. 15, the control server 100 first executes steps S41, S42, S43, and S44. In step S41, the communication control unit 112 waits for the wireless communication unit 213 to start wireless communication. In step S<b>42 , the communication control unit 112 waits for acquisition of transmission data from the controller 111 . In step S<b>43 , the communication control unit 112 acquires attribute information of transmission data from the controller 111 . At step S44, the communication control unit 112 adds a tag representing the attribute of the transmission data to the transmission data based on the attribute information.
 次に、コントロールサーバ100はステップS45を実行する。ステップS45では、送信データが通信サイクルの最初の送信データであるか否かを通信制御部112が確認する。 Next, the control server 100 executes step S45. In step S45, the communication control unit 112 confirms whether or not the transmission data is the first transmission data in the communication cycle.
 ステップS45において、送信データが通信サイクルの最初の送信データであると判定した場合、コントロールサーバ100はステップS46を実行する。ステップS46では、通信制御部112が、次の通信サイクルの開始タイミングを待機する。 If it is determined in step S45 that the transmission data is the first transmission data in the communication cycle, the control server 100 executes step S46. At step S46, the communication control unit 112 waits for the start timing of the next communication cycle.
 次に、コントロールサーバ100はステップS47を実行する。ステップS45において、送信データが通信サイクルの最初の送信データではないと判定した場合、コントロールサーバ100はステップS46を実行することなくステップS47を実行する。ステップS47では、通信制御部112が、送信データを送信バッファ211に格納する。その後、コントロールサーバ100は処理をステップS42に戻す。 Next, the control server 100 executes step S47. If it is determined in step S45 that the transmission data is not the first transmission data in the communication cycle, the control server 100 executes step S47 without executing step S46. In step S<b>47 , the communication control unit 112 stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 . After that, the control server 100 returns the process to step S42.
 以後、送信データの取得と、送信データへのタグの付加と、送信データの格納タイミングの調節と、送信データの送信バッファ211への格納とが繰り返される。送信データは、タグが表す属性に基づいて、当該属性に適した通信スロット510によって無線通信部213から無線通信部413に送信される。送信データの格納タイミングの調節によって、時分割複信パターンと通信サイクルとの関係が適切に維持される。 After that, acquisition of transmission data, addition of a tag to the transmission data, adjustment of the storage timing of the transmission data, and storage of the transmission data in the transmission buffer 211 are repeated. The transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication section 213 to the wireless communication section 413 through the communication slot 510 suitable for the attribute represented by the tag. By adjusting the storage timing of transmitted data, the relationship between the time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle is properly maintained.
(通信モードの切り替え手順)
 図16に示すように、コントロールサーバ100は、まずステップS51,S52を実行する。ステップS51では、通信モニタ131が、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価する。ステップS52では、通信モニタ131が、非同期スロット522における通信品質が低下したか否かを確認する。
(Procedure for switching communication modes)
As shown in FIG. 16, the control server 100 first executes steps S51 and S52. In step S<b>51 , the communication monitor 131 evaluates communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 . In step S52, the communication monitor 131 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 has deteriorated.
 ステップS52において、通信品質の低下を検出しなかった場合、コントロールサーバ100は処理をステップS51に戻す。ステップS52において、通信品質の低下を検出した場合、コントロールサーバ100はステップS53を実行する。ステップS53では、通信制御部112が、上記通常モードを上記イレギュラーモードに切り替える。 In step S52, if no deterioration in communication quality is detected, the control server 100 returns the process to step S51. In step S52, when the deterioration of communication quality is detected, the control server 100 executes step S53. In step S53, the communication control unit 112 switches the normal mode to the irregular mode.
 次に、コントロールサーバ100はステップS54,S55を実行する。ステップS54では、通信モニタ131が、非同期スロット522における通信品質と、同期スロット521における通信品質とを評価する。ステップS55では、非同期スロット522における通信品質が回復したか否かを通信モニタ131が確認する。 Next, the control server 100 executes steps S54 and S55. In step S<b>54 , the communication monitor 131 evaluates the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 and the communication quality in the synchronous slot 521 . In step S55, the communication monitor 131 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 has recovered.
 ステップS55において、通信品質の回復を検出しなかった場合、コントロールサーバ100はステップS56を実行する。ステップS56では、通信モニタ131が、同期スロット521における通信品質が低下したか否かを確認する。ステップS56において、通信品質の低下を検出しなかった場合、コントロールサーバ100は処理をステップS54に戻す。 In step S55, if recovery of communication quality is not detected, the control server 100 executes step S56. In step S56, the communication monitor 131 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 has deteriorated. In step S56, if no deterioration in communication quality is detected, the control server 100 returns the process to step S54.
 ステップS55において、通信品質の回復を検出した場合、コントロールサーバ100はステップS57を実行する。ステップS57では、通信制御部112が、イレギュラーモードを通常モードに切り替える。 In step S55, when recovery of communication quality is detected, the control server 100 executes step S57. In step S57, the communication control unit 112 switches the irregular mode to the normal mode.
 ステップS56において、通信品質の低下を検出した場合、コントロールサーバ100はステップS58,S59を実行する。ステップS58では、通信制御部112が、同期スロット521における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ131により検出された場合に、複数のコントローラ111による複数のマシン20の制御を中断させ、複数のマシン20の動作を停止させる。ステップS59では、リセット部132が、通信制御部112が複数のマシン20を停止させた後に、無線通信部213に無線通信のリセットを要求する。無線通信部213は、リセット部132からの要求に応じて、移動局400との間の無線通信をリセットする。 In step S56, if a decrease in communication quality is detected, the control server 100 executes steps S58 and S59. In step S58, when the communication monitor 131 detects that the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 is degraded, the communication control unit 112 interrupts the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111, and the operation of the machines 20 is stopped. to stop In step S<b>59 , the reset unit 132 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to reset wireless communication after the communication control unit 112 stops the machines 20 . Radio communication section 213 resets radio communication with mobile station 400 in response to a request from reset section 132 .
 ステップS57又はステップS59を実行した後、コントロールサーバ100は、処理をステップS51に戻す。コントロールサーバ100は以上の手順を繰り返す。 After executing step S57 or step S59, the control server 100 returns the process to step S51. The control server 100 repeats the above procedure.
〔ローカルコントローラ及び移動局による通信手順〕
 通信方法の一例として、ローカルコントローラ300及び移動局400による通信手順を更に例示する。この手順は、送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、送信データを第1種の通信スロット510により無線通信部413から基地局200に送信させることと、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、送信データを第2種の通信スロット510により無線通信部413から基地局200に送信させることと、を含む。
[Communication procedure by local controller and mobile station]
As an example of the communication method, a communication procedure by the local controller 300 and the mobile station 400 is further illustrated. This procedure is to transmit the transmission data from the wireless communication unit 413 to the base station 200 using the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data has the first attribute, and to transmit the transmission data to the base station 200 when the transmission data has the second attribute. , causing transmission data to be transmitted from the wireless communication unit 413 to the base station 200 using the second type communication slot 510 .
 また、この手順は、無線通信システム2を利用して、サイクリック通信を行うことと、サイクリック通信の連続する2以上の通信サイクルのそれぞれの少なくとも一部が、無線通信の1の時分割複信パターン内で行われるように、サイクリック通信を制御することと、を含む。 In addition, this procedure uses the wireless communication system 2 to perform cyclic communication, and at least a part of each of two or more consecutive communication cycles of the cyclic communication is one time-division multiplexing of wireless communication. and controlling cyclic communication to occur within a communication pattern.
 以下、この手順を、無線通信手順と、通信制御手順と、通信モードの変更手順とに分けて詳述する。(無線通信手順)図17に示すように、移動局400は、ステップS111,S112を順に実行する。ステップS111では、無線通信部413が、無線通信部213によるペアリングに対応し、無線通信部213から通知された時分割複信パターンによる無線通信を開始する。ステップS112では、無線通信部413が、現在の通信スロット510がアップリンクスロット512であるか否かを確認する。 In the following, this procedure is divided into a wireless communication procedure, a communication control procedure, and a communication mode change procedure, and will be described in detail. (Radio Communication Procedure) As shown in FIG. 17, the mobile station 400 sequentially executes steps S111 and S112. In step S<b>111 , wireless communication section 413 supports pairing by wireless communication section 213 and starts wireless communication according to the time division duplex pattern notified from wireless communication section 213 . In step S<b>112 , the wireless communication unit 413 checks whether the current communication slot 510 is the uplink slot 512 .
 ステップS112において、現在の通信スロット510がアップリンクスロット512であると判定した場合、移動局400はステップS113を実行する。ステップS113では、現在の通信スロット510が同期スロット521であるか否かを無線通信部413が確認する。 If it is determined in step S112 that the current communication slot 510 is the uplink slot 512, the mobile station 400 executes step S113. At step S113, the wireless communication unit 413 confirms whether the current communication slot 510 is the synchronization slot 521 or not.
 ステップS113において、現在の通信スロット510が同期スロット521であると判定した場合、移動局400はステップS114を実行する。ステップS114では、無線通信部413が、送信データに付されたタグに基づいて、同期スロット521用の送信データを送信バッファ411から読み出す。例えば無線通信部413は、上記第1タグが付された上記第1属性の送信データを送信バッファ411から読み出す。 If it is determined in step S113 that the current communication slot 510 is the synchronization slot 521, the mobile station 400 executes step S114. In step S114, wireless communication section 413 reads transmission data for synchronous slot 521 from transmission buffer 411 based on the tag attached to the transmission data. For example, the wireless communication unit 413 reads the transmission data with the first attribute attached with the first tag from the transmission buffer 411 .
 ステップS113において、現在の通信スロットが非同期スロットであると判定した場合、移動局400はステップS115を実行する。ステップS115では、無線通信部413が、送信データに付されたタグに基づいて、非同期スロット522用の送信データを送信バッファ411から読み出す。例えば無線通信部413は、上記第2タグが付された上記第2属性の送信データを送信バッファ411から読み出す。 If it is determined in step S113 that the current communication slot is an asynchronous slot, the mobile station 400 executes step S115. In step S115, the wireless communication unit 413 reads the transmission data for the asynchronous slot 522 from the transmission buffer 411 based on the tag attached to the transmission data. For example, the wireless communication unit 413 reads the transmission data with the second attribute attached with the second tag from the transmission buffer 411 .
 次に、移動局400はステップS116,S117を実行する。ステップS116では、無線通信部413が、送信バッファ411から読み出した送信データを無線通信部213に送信する。ステップS117では、無線通信部413が、無線通信部213からのアクノリッジがあるかを確認する。 Next, the mobile station 400 executes steps S116 and S117. In step S<b>116 , the wireless communication unit 413 transmits the transmission data read from the transmission buffer 411 to the wireless communication unit 213 . In step S<b>117 , wireless communication section 413 confirms whether there is an acknowledge from wireless communication section 213 .
 ステップS117において、アクノリッジがあると判定した場合、移動局400はステップS121,S122を実行する。ステップS121では、無線通信部413が、送信済みの送信データを送信バッファ411から削除する。ステップS122では、無線通信部413が、アクノリッジの受信タイミングに基づいて、ジッタの大きさを通信モニタ331に通知する。 If it is determined in step S117 that there is an acknowledgment, the mobile station 400 executes steps S121 and S122. In step S<b>121 , wireless communication section 413 deletes the transmitted transmission data from transmission buffer 411 . In step S122, the wireless communication unit 413 notifies the communication monitor 331 of the magnitude of jitter based on the reception timing of the acknowledgment.
 ステップS117において、アクノリッジがないと判定した場合、移動局400はステップS123を実行する。ステップS123では、無線通信部413が、パケットロスの発生を通信モニタ331に通知する。その後、移動局400は処理をステップS112に戻す。 If it is determined in step S117 that there is no acknowledge, the mobile station 400 executes step S123. In step S123, the wireless communication unit 413 notifies the communication monitor 331 of occurrence of packet loss. After that, the mobile station 400 returns the process to step S112.
 ステップS112において、現在の通信スロット510がアップリンクスロット512であると判定した場合、図18に示すように、移動局400はステップS131,S132を実行する。ステップS131では、無線通信部413が、無線通信部213から受信データを受信する。ステップS132では、無線通信部413が、受信データを正常に受信できたか否かを確認する。 When it is determined in step S112 that the current communication slot 510 is the uplink slot 512, the mobile station 400 executes steps S131 and S132 as shown in FIG. In step S<b>131 , wireless communication section 413 receives reception data from wireless communication section 213 . In step S132, wireless communication section 413 confirms whether or not the received data has been successfully received.
 ステップS132において、受信データを正常に受信できたと判定した場合、移動局400はステップS133,S134を実行する。ステップS133では、無線通信部413が、無線通信部213にアクノリッジを送信する。ステップS134では、無線通信部413が、受信データを受信バッファ412に格納する。その後、移動局400は処理をステップS112に戻す。 If it is determined in step S132 that the received data has been successfully received, the mobile station 400 executes steps S133 and S134. In step S<b>133 , wireless communication section 413 transmits an acknowledge to wireless communication section 213 . In step S<b>134 , wireless communication section 413 stores the received data in reception buffer 412 . After that, the mobile station 400 returns the process to step S112.
 ステップS132において、受信データを正常に受信できなかったと判定した場合、移動局400は、ステップS133,S134を実行することなく、処理をステップS112に戻す。移動局400は、以上の手順を繰り返すことで、通信スロットごとの通信を時分割で実行する。 If it is determined in step S132 that the received data could not be received normally, the mobile station 400 returns the process to step S112 without executing steps S133 and S134. Mobile station 400 performs communication for each communication slot in a time division manner by repeating the above procedure.
(通信制御手順)
 図19に示すように、ローカルコントローラ300は、まずステップS141,S142,S143,S144を実行する。ステップS141では、通信制御部312が、無線通信部413による無線通信の開始を待機する。ステップS142では、通信制御部312が、マシン駆動部311からの送信データの取得を待機する。ステップS143では、通信制御部312が、送信データの属性情報をマシン駆動部311から取得する。ステップS144では、通信制御部312が、属性情報に基づいて、送信データの属性を表すタグを送信データに付加する。
(Communication control procedure)
As shown in FIG. 19, the local controller 300 first executes steps S141, S142, S143 and S144. In step S141, the communication control unit 312 waits for the wireless communication unit 413 to start wireless communication. In step S<b>142 , the communication control section 312 waits for acquisition of transmission data from the machine driving section 311 . In step S<b>143 , the communication control section 312 acquires the attribute information of the transmission data from the machine driving section 311 . In step S144, communication control unit 312 adds a tag representing the attribute of the transmission data to the transmission data based on the attribute information.
 次に、ローカルコントローラ300はステップS145を実行する。ステップS145では、送信データが通信サイクルの最初の送信データであるか否かを通信制御部312が確認する。 Next, the local controller 300 executes step S145. In step S145, the communication control unit 312 confirms whether or not the transmission data is the first transmission data in the communication cycle.
 ステップS145において、送信データが通信サイクルの最初の送信データであると判定した場合、ローカルコントローラ300はステップS146を実行する。ステップS146では、通信制御部312が、次の通信サイクルの開始タイミングを待機する。 If it is determined in step S145 that the transmission data is the first transmission data in the communication cycle, the local controller 300 executes step S146. In step S146, the communication control unit 312 waits for the start timing of the next communication cycle.
 次に、ローカルコントローラ300はステップS147を実行する。ステップS145において、送信データが通信サイクルの最初の送信データではないと判定した場合、ローカルコントローラ300はステップS146を実行することなくステップS147を実行する。ステップS147では、通信制御部312が、送信データを送信バッファ411に格納する。その後、ローカルコントローラ300は処理をステップS142に戻す。 Next, the local controller 300 executes step S147. If it is determined in step S145 that the transmission data is not the first transmission data in the communication cycle, the local controller 300 executes step S147 without executing step S146. In step S<b>147 , the communication control unit 312 stores the transmission data in the transmission buffer 411 . After that, the local controller 300 returns the process to step S142.
 以後、送信データの取得と、送信データへのタグの付加と、送信データの格納タイミングの調節と、送信データの送信バッファ411への格納とが繰り返される。送信データは、タグが表す属性に基づいて、当該属性に適した通信スロット510によって無線通信部413から無線通信部213に送信される。送信データの格納タイミングの調節によって、時分割複信パターンと通信サイクルとの関係が適切に維持される。 Thereafter, acquisition of transmission data, addition of a tag to transmission data, adjustment of the storage timing of transmission data, and storage of transmission data in transmission buffer 411 are repeated. The transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit 413 to the wireless communication unit 213 through the communication slot 510 suitable for the attribute represented by the tag. By adjusting the storage timing of transmitted data, the relationship between the time division duplex pattern and the communication cycle is properly maintained.
(通信モードの切り替え手順)
 図20に示すように、コントロールサーバ100は、まずステップS151,S152を実行する。ステップS151では、通信モニタ331が、非同期スロット522における通信品質を評価する。ステップS152では、通信モニタ331が、非同期スロット522における通信品質が低下したか否かを確認する。
(Procedure for switching communication modes)
As shown in FIG. 20, the control server 100 first executes steps S151 and S152. In step S<b>151 , the communication monitor 331 evaluates communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 . In step S152, the communication monitor 331 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 has deteriorated.
 ステップS152において、通信品質の低下を検出しなかった場合、ローカルコントローラ300は処理をステップS151に戻す。ステップS152において、通信品質の低下を検出した場合、ローカルコントローラ300はステップS153を実行する。ステップS153では、通信制御部312が、上記通常モードを上記イレギュラーモードに切り替える。通信制御部312は、上記通常モードを上記イレギュラーモードに切り替えることを通信制御部112に要求してもよい。 In step S152, if no deterioration in communication quality is detected, the local controller 300 returns the process to step S151. In step S152, when the deterioration of communication quality is detected, the local controller 300 performs step S153. In step S153, the communication control unit 312 switches the normal mode to the irregular mode. The communication control unit 312 may request the communication control unit 112 to switch the normal mode to the irregular mode.
 次に、ローカルコントローラ300はステップS154,S155を実行する。ステップS154では、通信モニタ331が、非同期スロット522における通信品質と、同期スロット521における通信品質とを評価する。ステップS155では、非同期スロット522における通信品質が回復したか否かを通信モニタ331が確認する。 Next, the local controller 300 executes steps S154 and S155. In step S<b>154 , the communication monitor 331 evaluates the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 and the communication quality in the synchronous slot 521 . In step S155, the communication monitor 331 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the asynchronous slot 522 has recovered.
 ステップS155において、通信品質の回復を検出しなかった場合、ローカルコントローラ300はステップS156を実行する。ステップS156では、通信モニタ331が、同期スロット521における通信品質が低下したか否かを確認する。ステップS156において、通信品質の低下を検出しなかった場合、ローカルコントローラ300は処理をステップS154に戻す。 In step S155, if recovery of communication quality is not detected, the local controller 300 executes step S156. In step S156, the communication monitor 331 confirms whether or not the communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 has deteriorated. In step S156, if no deterioration in communication quality is detected, the local controller 300 returns the process to step S154.
 ステップS155において、通信品質の回復を検出した場合、ローカルコントローラ300はステップS157を実行する。ステップS157では、通信制御部312が、イレギュラーモードを通常モードに切り替える。通信制御部312は、イレギュラーモードを通常モードに切り替えることを通信制御部112に要求してもよい。 In step S155, when recovery of communication quality is detected, the local controller 300 executes step S157. In step S157, the communication control unit 312 switches the irregular mode to the normal mode. The communication control section 312 may request the communication control section 112 to switch the irregular mode to the normal mode.
 ステップS156において、通信品質の低下を検出した場合、コントロールサーバ100はステップS158,S159を実行する。ステップS158では、通信制御部312が、同期スロット521における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ131により検出された場合に、複数のコントローラ111による複数のマシン20の制御を中断させ、複数のマシン20の動作を停止させる。例えば通信制御部312は、同期スロット521における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ331により検出された場合に、複数のマシン20の停止要求を通信制御部112に送信する。停止要求を受信した通信制御部112は、複数のコントローラ111による複数のマシン20の制御を中断させ、複数のマシン20を停止させる。ステップS159では、リセット部332は、通信制御部312が複数のマシン20を停止させた後に、無線通信部413に無線通信のリセットを要求する。無線通信部413は、リセット部332からの要求に応じて、基地局200との間の無線通信をリセットする。例えば無線通信部413は、上記ペアリングの再度実行を無線通信部213に要求する。 In step S156, when the deterioration of communication quality is detected, the control server 100 executes steps S158 and S159. In step S158, when the communication monitor 131 detects a decrease in communication quality in the synchronization slot 521, the communication control unit 312 suspends the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111, and the operation of the machines 20 is stopped. to stop For example, the communication control unit 312 transmits a request to stop the plurality of machines 20 to the communication control unit 112 when the communication monitor 331 detects deterioration of communication quality in the synchronization slot 521 . The communication control unit 112 that has received the stop request interrupts the control of the machines 20 by the controllers 111 to stop the machines 20 . In step S<b>159 , the reset unit 332 requests the wireless communication unit 413 to reset wireless communication after the communication control unit 312 stops the machines 20 . Radio communication section 413 resets radio communication with base station 200 in response to a request from reset section 332 . For example, the wireless communication unit 413 requests the wireless communication unit 213 to perform the pairing again.
 ステップS157又はステップS159を実行した後、ローカルコントローラ300は、処理をステップS151に戻す。ローカルコントローラ300は以上の手順を繰り返す。 After executing step S157 or step S159, the local controller 300 returns the process to step S151. The local controller 300 repeats the above procedure.
〔実施形態の効果〕
 無線通信装置5,6は、第1種の通信スロット510と、第2種の通信スロット510とを含む複数の通信スロット510を時分割で配列した時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、相手無線通信部213,413との間で無線通信を行う無線通信部213,413と、アプリケーション3が生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合には、送信データを第1種の通信スロット510により無線通信部213,413から相手無線通信部213,413に送信させ、送信データが第2属性を有する場合には、送信データを第2種の通信スロット510により無線通信部213,413から相手無線通信部213,413に送信させる通信制御部112,312と、を備える。
[Effect of Embodiment]
The wireless communication devices 5 and 6 repeat a time-division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots 510 including a first-type communication slot 510 and a second-type communication slot 510 are arranged in a time-division manner to perform wireless communication with the other party. When the transmission data generated by the wireless communication units 213 and 413 and the application 3 has the first attribute, the transmission data is wirelessly communicated through the first type communication slot 510. 213, 413 to the other party's wireless communication section 213, 413, and when the transmission data has the second attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication section 213, 413 to the other party's wireless communication section through the second type communication slot 510. and communication control units 112 and 312 that cause 213 and 413 to transmit.
 時分割複信パターンを繰り返す場合、複数の通信スロット510の通信の信頼性が、時分割複信パターンにおける位置によって互いに相違し得る。これに対し、送信データの属性に応じて、送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを制御することができる。これにより、例えば、高い信頼性での送信が求められる送信データを、信頼性の高い通信スロット510で送信し、低い信頼性での送信が許容される送信データを、信頼性の低い通信スロット510で送信することができる。
従って、通信の信頼性と、通信速度との両立に有効である。
When repeating the time division duplex pattern, the communication reliability of the plurality of communication slots 510 may differ depending on their position in the time division duplex pattern. On the other hand, it is possible to control in which communication slot 510 the transmission data is transmitted according to the attribute of the transmission data. As a result, for example, transmission data that requires transmission with high reliability is transmitted in the communication slot 510 with high reliability, and transmission data that is allowed to be transmitted in low reliability is transmitted in the communication slot 510 with low reliability. can be sent by
Therefore, it is effective in achieving both reliability of communication and communication speed.
 複数の通信スロット510のそれぞれは、時分割複信のダウンリンクスロット511又はアップリンクスロット512であり、第1種の通信スロット510は、ダウンリンクスロット511であるかアップリンクスロット512であるかが、同じタイミングで行われる他の無線通信の通信スロット510と一致する同期スロット521であり、第2種の通信スロット510は、ダウンリンクスロット511であるかアップリンクスロット512であるかが、他の無線通信の通信スロット510と一致しない非同期スロット522であり、通信制御部112,312は、第1優先度を有する送信データが第1種の通信スロット510により相手無線通信部213,413に送信され、第1優先度よりも低い第2優先度を有する送信データが第2種の通信スロット510により相手無線通信部213,413に送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。優先度の高い送信データを同期スロット521で送信させ、優先度の低い送信データを非同期スロット522で送信させることによって、通信の信頼性と、通信速度との両立を図ることができる。 Each of the plurality of communication slots 510 is a time division duplex downlink slot 511 or an uplink slot 512, and the first type communication slot 510 is either the downlink slot 511 or the uplink slot 512. , is a synchronous slot 521 that matches the communication slot 510 of another wireless communication that is performed at the same timing, and the type 2 communication slot 510 is a downlink slot 511 or an uplink slot 512. It is an asynchronous slot 522 that does not match the communication slot 510 of wireless communication, and the communication control units 112 and 312 control that the transmission data having the first priority is transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication unit 213 and 413 through the first type communication slot 510. , the wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so that transmission data having a second priority lower than the first priority is transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 using the second type communication slot 510. . By transmitting high-priority transmission data in the synchronous slot 521 and low-priority transmission data in the asynchronous slot 522, both communication reliability and communication speed can be achieved.
 アプリケーション3は産業機械を制御するための制御データの送受信を行い、通信制御部112,312は、送信データが制御データである場合に、送信データが第1種の通信スロット510で送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。制御の信頼性を向上させることができる。 The application 3 transmits and receives control data for controlling the industrial machine, and the communication control units 112 and 312 control the transmission data so that the transmission data is transmitted in the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is the control data. Alternatively, the wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled. Control reliability can be improved.
 通信制御部112,312は、送信データが、制御データではない場合に、送信データが第2種の通信スロット510で送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。制御の信頼性と、制御の高速化との両立を図ることができる。 The communication control units 112 and 312 may control the wireless communication units 213 and 413 so that the transmission data is transmitted in the second type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is not control data. It is possible to achieve both reliability of control and speeding up of control.
 通信制御部112,312は、送信データが、産業機械の異常を通知する異常通知データである場合に、送信データが第1種の通信スロット510で送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。産業機械の異常への対処の遅れを抑制することができる。 The communication control units 112 and 312 control the wireless communication units 213 and 413 so that the transmission data is transmitted in the first type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is abnormality notification data for notifying the abnormality of the industrial machine. may be controlled. Delays in coping with abnormalities in industrial machinery can be suppressed.
 通信制御部112,312は、送信データが、異常通知データに比較して緊急性の低い通知データである場合に、送信データが第2種の通信スロット510で送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。緊急性の低い通知データを第2種の通信スロット510に割り当てることで、第1種の通信スロット510を更に有効に活用することができる。 The communication control units 112 and 312 control the wireless communication unit 213 so that the transmission data is transmitted in the second type communication slot 510 when the transmission data is less urgent notification data than the abnormality notification data. , 413 may be controlled. By allocating less urgent notification data to the second type communication slot 510, the first type communication slot 510 can be used more effectively.
 第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質を評価する通信モニタ131,331を更に備えてもよい。第1種の通信スロット510に比較して通信の信頼性が低い第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質を評価することによって、通信品質の低下の発生を迅速に検知することができる。 Communication monitors 131 and 331 for evaluating communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 may be further provided. By evaluating the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510, which has lower communication reliability than the first type communication slot 510, it is possible to quickly detect the occurrence of deterioration in communication quality.
 通信制御部112,312は、通信モニタ131,331により第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、無線通信部213,413に無線通信の信号強度の上昇を要求してもよい。通信品質の低下を容易に解消させることができる。 When the communication monitors 131 and 331 detect the deterioration of the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510, the communication control sections 112 and 312 request the wireless communication sections 213 and 413 to increase the signal strength of the wireless communication. may A decrease in communication quality can be easily eliminated.
 アプリケーション3は、相手無線通信部213,413から受信した受信データに基づく送信データの生成と、相手無線通信部213,413への送信データの送信とを含む通信サイクルを繰り返し、通信制御部112,312は、通信モニタ131,331により第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、通信サイクルを長くして1の通信サイクルに対応する時分割複信パターンの数を増やし、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データの両方が第1種の通信スロット510により相手無線通信部213,413に送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。通信品質の低下を容易に解消させることができる。 The application 3 repeats a communication cycle including generation of transmission data based on the reception data received from the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 and transmission of the transmission data to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413. 312 lengthens the communication cycle and increases the number of time-division duplex patterns corresponding to one communication cycle when the communication monitors 131 and 331 detect deterioration in communication quality in the second type communication slot 510. , the wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so that both the first attribute transmission data and the second attribute transmission data are transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 through the first type communication slot 510. . A decrease in communication quality can be easily resolved.
 通信制御部112,312は、通信モニタ131,331により第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データを圧縮し、第1属性の送信データ及び第2属性の送信データの両方が第1種の通信スロット510により送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。通信品質の低下を容易に解消させることができる。 When the communication monitors 131 and 331 detect deterioration of communication quality in the second type communication slot 510, the communication control units 112 and 312 compress the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute, The wireless communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so that both the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute are transmitted by the communication slot 510 of the first type. A decrease in communication quality can be easily resolved.
 通信制御部112,312は、第3属性の送信データが第2種の通信スロット510により相手無線通信部213,413に送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御し、通信モニタ131,331は、第2種の通信スロット510による第2属性の送信データの送信が行われない場合に、第2種の通信スロット510による第3属性の送信データの通信品質を評価してもよい。第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の評価を継続し、第2属性の送信データを送信するスロットを、通信品質の改善に応じて第2種の通信スロット510から第1種の通信スロット510に迅速に戻すことができる。 The communication control units 112 and 312 control the wireless communication units 213 and 413 so that the transmission data of the third attribute is transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 through the second type communication slot 510, and the communication monitors 131 and 413 331 may evaluate the communication quality of the transmission data of the third attribute through the second type communication slot 510 when the transmission data of the second attribute through the second type communication slot 510 is not transmitted. The evaluation of the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 is continued, and the slot for transmitting the transmission data of the second attribute is changed from the second type communication slot 510 to the first type communication slot 510 according to the improvement of the communication quality. can be quickly returned to
 通信制御部112,312は、通信モニタ131,331により第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、第2種の通信スロット510により送信された第2属性の送信データが、次の時分割複信パターンの第2種の通信スロット510により再度送信されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。通信品質が低下した状態においても、第2種の通信スロット510を有効活用することができる。 When the communication monitors 131 and 331 detect that the communication quality in the second type communication slot 510 is degraded, the communication control units 112 and 312 control the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted by the second type communication slot 510. However, the radio communication units 213 and 413 may be controlled so as to be transmitted again by the second type communication slot 510 of the next time division duplex pattern. The second type communication slot 510 can be effectively used even when the communication quality is degraded.
 通信制御部112,312は、通信モニタ131,331により第2種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、第2種の通信スロット510により第2属性の送信データを送信することが少なくとも部分的に中断されるように無線通信部213,413を制御してもよい。通信品質が低下した第2種の通信スロット510による誤ったデータ送信を容易に抑制することができる。 When communication monitors 131 and 331 detect deterioration in communication quality in the second type communication slot 510, the communication control units 112 and 312 transmit transmission data of the second attribute through the second type communication slot 510. The wireless communication unit 213, 413 may be controlled such that the communication is at least partially interrupted. It is possible to easily suppress erroneous data transmission by the second type communication slot 510 with deteriorated communication quality.
 通信モニタ131,331は、第1種の通信スロット510における通信品質を更に評価し、通信制御部112,312は、第1種の通信スロット510における通信品質の低下が通信モニタ131,331により検出された場合に、アプリケーション3を停止させ、無線通信装置5,6は、アプリケーション3が停止した後に、無線通信部213,413と相手無線通信部213,413との間における無線通信をリセットするリセット部132,332を更に備えてもよい。通信不良の継続を容易に回避することができる。 The communication monitors 131, 331 further evaluate the communication quality in the first type communication slot 510, and the communication control units 112, 312 detect the deterioration of the communication quality in the first type communication slot 510 by the communication monitors 131, 331. When the application 3 is stopped, the wireless communication devices 5 and 6 reset the wireless communication between the wireless communication units 213 and 413 and the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 after the application 3 is stopped. A portion 132, 332 may also be provided. The continuation of poor communication can be easily avoided.
 通信制御部112,312は、送信データが第1属性を有する場合に第1タグを付して送信データを無線通信部213,413に引渡し、送信データが第2属性を有する場合に第2タグを付して送信データを無線通信部213,413に引渡し、無線通信部213,413は、送信データに第1タグが付されている場合に第1種の通信スロット510により送信データを相手無線通信部213,413に送信し、送信データに第2タグが付されている場合に第2種の通信スロット510により送信データを相手無線通信部213,413に送信してもよい。送信データに付加するタグによって、送信データをいずれの通信スロット510で送信するかを容易に制御することができる。 The communication control units 112 and 312 attach the first tag to the transmission data when the transmission data has the first attribute, and deliver the transmission data to the wireless communication units 213 and 413. When the transmission data has the second attribute, the communication control units 112 and 312 attach the second tag to the transmission data. is attached to the transmission data to the wireless communication units 213 and 413, and the wireless communication units 213 and 413 transmit the transmission data to the other wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot 510 when the first tag is attached to the transmission data. The transmission data may be transmitted to the communication units 213 and 413, and the transmission data may be transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication units 213 and 413 using the second type communication slot 510 when the second tag is attached to the transmission data. It is possible to easily control in which communication slot 510 the transmission data is transmitted by the tag attached to the transmission data.
 以上、実施形態について説明したが、本発明は必ずしも上述した実施形態に限定されるものではなく、その要旨を逸脱しない範囲で様々な変更が可能である。 Although the embodiments have been described above, the present invention is not necessarily limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications are possible without departing from the gist thereof.
 1…通信システム、2…無線通信システム、3…アプリケーション、10…デバイスシステム、20…マシン、112,312…通信制御部、5,6…無線通信装置、900…他の無線通信システム、111…コントローラ、213,413…無線通信部、113…コンフィギュレーション情報取得部、114…通信パターン設定部、511…ダウンリンクスロット、512…アップリンクスロット、510…通信スロット、521…同期スロット、522…非同期スロット、122…目標設定部、131,331…通信モニタ、132,332…リセット部。 DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1... Communication system 2... Wireless communication system 3... Application 10... Device system 20... Machine 112, 312... Communication control unit 5, 6... Wireless communication apparatus 900... Another wireless communication system 111... Controller 213, 413... Wireless communication unit 113... Configuration information acquisition unit 114... Communication pattern setting unit 511... Downlink slot 512... Uplink slot 510... Communication slot 521... Synchronous slot 522... Asynchronous Slot, 122 --- Target setting section, 131, 331 --- Communication monitor, 132, 332 --- Reset section.

Claims (18)

  1.  第1種の通信スロットと、第2種の通信スロットとを含む複数の通信スロットを時分割で配列した時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、相手無線通信部との間で無線通信を行う無線通信部と、
     アプリケーションが生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合には、前記送信データを前記第1種の通信スロットにより前記無線通信部から前記相手無線通信部に送信させ、前記送信データが第2属性を有する場合には、前記送信データを前記第2種の通信スロットにより前記無線通信部から前記相手無線通信部に送信させる通信制御部と、を備える無線通信装置。
    Radio communication in which radio communication is performed with a counterpart radio communication unit by repeating a time division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots including a first type communication slot and a second type communication slot are arranged in a time division manner. Department and
    When the transmission data generated by the application has the first attribute, the transmission data is transmitted from the wireless communication unit to the counterpart wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot, and the transmission data has the second attribute. and a communication control unit for transmitting the transmission data from the wireless communication unit to the counterpart wireless communication unit using the second type communication slot, if the wireless communication device has the second type communication slot.
  2.  前記複数の通信スロットのそれぞれは、時分割複信のダウンリンクスロット又はアップリンクスロットであり、
     前記第1種の通信スロットは、前記ダウンリンクスロットであるか前記アップリンクスロットであるかが、同じタイミングで行われる他の無線通信の通信スロットと一致する同期スロットであり、
     前記第2種の通信スロットは、前記ダウンリンクスロットであるか前記アップリンクスロットであるかが、前記他の無線通信の通信スロットと一致しない非同期スロットであり、
     前記通信制御部は、第1優先度を有する前記送信データが前記第1種の通信スロットにより前記相手無線通信部に送信され、前記第1優先度よりも低い第2優先度を有する前記送信データが前記第2種の通信スロットにより前記相手無線通信部に送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項1記載の無線通信装置。
    each of the plurality of communication slots is a time division duplex downlink slot or uplink slot;
    The first type communication slot is a synchronous slot in which whether it is the downlink slot or the uplink slot matches a communication slot of another wireless communication performed at the same timing,
    The second type communication slot is an asynchronous slot that does not match the communication slot of the other wireless communication in terms of whether it is the downlink slot or the uplink slot,
    The communication control unit transmits the transmission data having a first priority to the counterpart wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot, and the transmission data having a second priority lower than the first priority. 2. The wireless communication device according to claim 1, wherein said wireless communication unit is controlled so that is transmitted to said counterpart wireless communication unit through said second type communication slot.
  3.  前記アプリケーションは産業機械を制御するための制御データの送受信を行い、
     前記通信制御部は、前記送信データが前記制御データである場合に、前記送信データが前記第1種の通信スロットで送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項2記載の無線通信装置。
    The application transmits and receives control data for controlling an industrial machine,
    3. The wireless communication according to claim 2, wherein when the transmission data is the control data, the communication control section controls the wireless communication section so that the transmission data is transmitted in the first type communication slot. Device.
  4.  前記通信制御部は、前記送信データが、前記制御データではない場合に、前記送信データが前記第2種の通信スロットで送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項3記載の無線通信装置。 4. The radio according to claim 3, wherein when said transmission data is not said control data, said communication control section controls said wireless communication section so that said transmission data is transmitted in said second type communication slot. Communication device.
  5.  前記通信制御部は、前記送信データが、前記産業機械の異常を通知する異常通知データである場合に、前記送信データが前記第1種の通信スロットで送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項3又は4記載の無線通信装置。 The communication control unit controls the wireless communication unit so that the transmission data is transmitted in the first type communication slot when the transmission data is abnormality notification data for notifying an abnormality of the industrial machine. 5. The radio communication device according to claim 3 or 4, wherein
  6.  前記通信制御部は、前記送信データが、前記異常通知データに比較して緊急性の低い通知データである場合に、前記送信データが前記第2種の通信スロットで送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項5記載の無線通信装置。 The communication control unit controls the wireless communication so that the transmission data is transmitted in the second type communication slot when the transmission data is notification data with less urgency than the abnormality notification data. 6. The wireless communication device of claim 5, controlling a unit.
  7.  前記第2種の通信スロットにおける通信品質を評価する通信モニタを更に備える、
    請求項2~6のいずれか一項記載の無線通信装置。
    Further comprising a communication monitor that evaluates communication quality in the second type communication slot,
    The radio communication device according to any one of claims 2-6.
  8.  前記通信制御部は、前記通信モニタにより前記第2種の通信スロットにおける通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、前記無線通信部に前記無線通信の信号強度の上昇を要求する、請求項7記載の無線通信装置。 8. The communication control unit according to claim 7, wherein, when the communication monitor detects a deterioration in communication quality in the second type communication slot, the communication control unit requests the wireless communication unit to increase the signal strength of the wireless communication. radio communication equipment.
  9.  前記アプリケーションは、前記相手無線通信部から受信した受信データに基づく前記送信データの生成と、前記相手無線通信部への前記送信データの送信とを含む通信サイクルを繰り返し、
     前記通信制御部は、前記通信モニタにより前記第2種の通信スロットにおける通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、前記通信サイクルを長くして1の前記通信サイクルに対応する前記時分割複信パターンの数を増やし、前記第1属性の前記送信データ及び前記第2属性の前記送信データの両方が前記第1種の通信スロットにより前記相手無線通信部に送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項7又は8記載の無線通信装置。
    The application repeats a communication cycle including generation of the transmission data based on the reception data received from the counterpart wireless communication unit and transmission of the transmission data to the counterpart wireless communication unit,
    When the communication monitor detects a deterioration in communication quality in the second type communication slot, the communication control unit lengthens the communication cycle and performs the time division duplex pattern corresponding to one communication cycle. and controlling the wireless communication unit so that both the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute are transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot. 9. The radio communication device according to claim 7 or 8, wherein
  10.  前記通信制御部は、前記通信モニタにより前記第2種の通信スロットにおける通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、前記第1属性の前記送信データ及び前記第2属性の前記送信データを圧縮し、前記第1属性の前記送信データ及び前記第2属性の前記送信データの両方が前記第1種の通信スロットにより送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項7又は8記載の無線通信装置。 The communication control unit compresses the transmission data of the first attribute and the transmission data of the second attribute when the communication monitor detects deterioration of communication quality in the second type communication slot, 9. The wireless communication according to claim 7, wherein said wireless communication unit is controlled such that both said transmission data of said first attribute and said transmission data of said second attribute are transmitted by said communication slot of said first type. Device.
  11.  前記通信制御部は、第3属性の前記送信データが前記第2種の通信スロットにより前記相手無線通信部に送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御し、
     前記通信モニタは、前記第2種の通信スロットによる前記第2属性の前記送信データの
    送信が行われない場合に、前記第2種の通信スロットによる前記第3属性の前記送信データの通信品質を評価する、請求項9又は10記載の無線通信装置。
    The communication control unit controls the wireless communication unit so that the transmission data having a third attribute is transmitted to the counterpart wireless communication unit using the second type communication slot,
    The communication monitor determines the communication quality of the transmission data with the third attribute in the second type communication slot when the transmission data with the second attribute is not transmitted in the second type communication slot. 11. The wireless communication device of claim 9 or 10, wherein evaluating.
  12.  前記通信制御部は、前記通信モニタにより前記第2種の通信スロットにおける通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、前記第2種の通信スロットにより送信された前記第2属性の前記送信データが、次の前記時分割複信パターンの前記第2種の通信スロットにより再度送信されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項7又は8記載の無線通信装置。 When the communication monitor detects deterioration of communication quality in the second type communication slot, the communication control unit changes the transmission data of the second attribute transmitted in the second type communication slot to 9. The radio communication apparatus according to claim 7, wherein said radio communication unit is controlled to retransmit in said second type communication slot of said next time division duplex pattern.
  13.  前記通信制御部は、前記通信モニタにより前記第2種の通信スロットにおける通信品質の低下が検出された場合に、前記第2種の通信スロットにより前記第2属性の前記送信データを送信することが少なくとも部分的に中断されるように前記無線通信部を制御する、請求項7又は8記載の無線通信装置。 The communication control unit may transmit the transmission data of the second attribute using the second type communication slot when the communication monitor detects a deterioration in communication quality in the second type communication slot. 9. A wireless communication device according to claim 7 or 8, controlling said wireless communication unit to be at least partially interrupted.
  14.  前記通信モニタは、前記第1種の通信スロットにおける通信品質を更に評価し、
     前記通信制御部は、前記第1種の通信スロットにおける通信品質の低下が前記通信モニタにより検出された場合に、前記アプリケーションを停止させ、
     前記無線通信装置は、前記アプリケーションが停止した後に、前記無線通信部と前記相手無線通信部との間における無線通信をリセットするリセット部を更に備える、請求項7~13のいずれか一項記載の無線通信装置。
    The communication monitor further evaluates communication quality in the first type communication slot,
    The communication control unit suspends the application when the communication monitor detects deterioration of communication quality in the first type communication slot,
    The wireless communication device according to any one of claims 7 to 13, further comprising a reset unit that resets wireless communication between the wireless communication unit and the counterpart wireless communication unit after the application stops. wireless communication device.
  15.  前記通信モニタは、パケットのロス率に基づいて前記第2種の通信スロットにおける通信品質を評価する、請求項7~14のいずれか一項記載の無線通信装置。 The wireless communication device according to any one of claims 7 to 14, wherein said communication monitor evaluates communication quality in said second type communication slot based on a packet loss rate.
  16.  前記通信モニタは、ジッタの大きさに基づいて前記第2種の通信スロットにおける通信品質を評価する、請求項7~15のいずれか一項記載の無線通信装置。 The wireless communication device according to any one of claims 7 to 15, wherein said communication monitor evaluates communication quality in said second type communication slot based on the magnitude of jitter.
  17.  前記通信制御部は、前記送信データが前記第1属性を有する場合に第1タグを付して前記送信データを前記無線通信部に引渡し、前記送信データが前記第2属性を有する場合に第2タグを付して前記送信データを前記無線通信部に引渡し、
     前記無線通信部は、前記送信データに前記第1タグが付されている場合に前記第1種の通信スロットにより前記送信データを前記相手無線通信部に送信し、前記送信データに前記第2タグが付されている場合に前記第2種の通信スロットにより前記送信データを前記相手無線通信部に送信する、請求項1~16のいずれか一項記載の無線通信装置。
    The communication control unit attaches a first tag to the transmission data when the transmission data has the first attribute and delivers the transmission data to the wireless communication unit, and when the transmission data has the second attribute, the second tag. Attaching a tag and handing over the transmission data to the wireless communication unit;
    The wireless communication unit transmits the transmission data to the counterpart wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot when the transmission data is attached with the first tag, and transmits the transmission data with the second tag. The wireless communication device according to any one of claims 1 to 16, wherein the transmission data is transmitted to the partner wireless communication unit using the second type communication slot when is attached.
  18.  第1種の通信スロットと、第2種の通信スロットとを含む複数の通信スロットを時分割で配列した時分割複信パターンを繰り返して、無線通信部と相手無線通信部との間で無線通信が行われている状態にて、
     アプリケーションが生成した送信データが第1属性を有する場合に、前記送信データを前記第1種の通信スロットにより前記無線通信部から前記相手無線通信部に送信させることと、
     前記送信データが第2属性を有する場合に、前記送信データを前記第2種の通信スロットにより前記無線通信部から前記相手無線通信部に送信させることと、を含む通信方法。
    Radio communication between a radio communication unit and a counterpart radio communication unit by repeating a time division duplex pattern in which a plurality of communication slots including a first type communication slot and a second type communication slot are arranged in a time division manner. is being performed,
    When transmission data generated by an application has a first attribute, transmitting the transmission data from the wireless communication unit to the counterpart wireless communication unit using the first type communication slot;
    and causing the wireless communication unit to transmit the transmission data to the counterpart wireless communication unit using the second type communication slot when the transmission data has a second attribute.
PCT/JP2021/036849 2021-10-05 2021-10-05 Radio communication device and communication method WO2023058120A1 (en)

Priority Applications (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2021/036849 WO2023058120A1 (en) 2021-10-05 2021-10-05 Radio communication device and communication method
JP2023552444A JPWO2023058120A1 (en) 2021-10-05 2021-10-05

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/JP2021/036849 WO2023058120A1 (en) 2021-10-05 2021-10-05 Radio communication device and communication method

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2023058120A1 true WO2023058120A1 (en) 2023-04-13

Family

ID=85804033

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2021/036849 WO2023058120A1 (en) 2021-10-05 2021-10-05 Radio communication device and communication method

Country Status (2)

Country Link
JP (1) JPWO2023058120A1 (en)
WO (1) WO2023058120A1 (en)

Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11285059A (en) * 1998-02-09 1999-10-15 Lg Information & Commun Ltd Data communication method between base station and mobile terminal in mobile communication system
WO2020194760A1 (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-01 株式会社Nttドコモ User device and base station device

Patent Citations (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH11285059A (en) * 1998-02-09 1999-10-15 Lg Information & Commun Ltd Data communication method between base station and mobile terminal in mobile communication system
WO2020194760A1 (en) * 2019-03-28 2020-10-01 株式会社Nttドコモ User device and base station device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
JPWO2023058120A1 (en) 2023-04-13

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4902905B2 (en) Message transmission method, communication method, deferred acknowledgment communication system, and message transmission system
US4769807A (en) Loop back control system
JP2018536571A (en) Ground station, unmanned aerial vehicle, and communication system and method between ground station and unmanned aerial vehicle
JP2013230534A (en) Control apparatus, control method and program
WO2015129664A1 (en) Wireless communication system, wireless communication device, wireless communication method, and program
CN102388584A (en) Method and device for controlling congestion
WO2023058120A1 (en) Radio communication device and communication method
WO2023058121A1 (en) Communication system, communication control circuit, and communication method
WO2023058116A1 (en) Communication system and communication method
JP5882694B2 (en) COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, COMMUNICATION DEVICE, COMMUNICATION METHOD, AND PROGRAM
US8270288B2 (en) Method of parallel wireless communication
US7421051B2 (en) Radio communication system and method, wireless network forming device, radio transmission unit and method, and radio reception unit and method
EP4055783B1 (en) Method and system for exchanging periodic data in a mobile telecommunications network
JP6901006B2 (en) Control device, control target device, control system, control method, control target device control method, control device program, and control target device program
WO2023148956A1 (en) Communication system, communication device, and communication method
US6654385B1 (en) Message division communication method and communication system
WO2023281805A1 (en) Communication system, control system, and communication method
JP2005237163A (en) Motor drive device
JP3655610B2 (en) Method for handling unexpected transmission interruptions in wireless communication systems
JP4573459B2 (en) Wireless terminal device, transmission control device, wireless transmission control method, and program
Traynham et al. SDLC and BSC on satellite links: A performance comparison
US6711179B1 (en) Signal processing apparatus with three layer processing sections, and signal processing system with said two signal processing apparatuses
JP6863274B2 (en) Transmitters and their control methods, communication systems, and communication control programs
US11509430B2 (en) Method for operating an automation network having packet-based communication between a host and client
US20220331951A1 (en) Robot control system, lower-level control apparatus, and control method for robot

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 21959862

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

WWE Wipo information: entry into national phase

Ref document number: 2023552444

Country of ref document: JP